JP2016112323A - System for game and information display device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enable a player to acquire game histories corresponding to the kinds of game machines, and to enable the player to browse an individual game history corresponding to the kinds of game machines.SOLUTION: A first system 1A for games includes a data display device 400 provided corresponding to a pachinko machine 200A to be one kind of an information display device which can display a game history, and a portable telephone 16A being one kind of a player terminal carried by the player. The data display device 400 performs setting that corresponds to the kind of the corresponding pachinko machine 200A, and outputs specific information which can specify a common individual game history that is an individual game history from the start of a game to the end by the player at the corresponding pachinko machine 200A, and is common without depending upon setting, and a unique individual game history that is different according to setting. The portable telephone 16A displays common individual game history and a unique individual game history specified from a specific information outputted from the data display device 400 in a display part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system including an information display device provided corresponding to a gaming machine and capable of displaying a gaming history, and a player terminal possessed by a player who plays with the gaming machine, and a gaming machine. The present invention relates to an information display device provided correspondingly and capable of displaying a game history.

  In stores where pachinko machines and slot machines, which are a type of gaming machine, are installed, corresponding to these gaming machines, a data display device and a call lamp device for displaying a gaming history of a player who plays with the gaming machine, An information display device such as a card unit and a game device are generally installed.

  As a technique related to such an information display apparatus, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a technique related to an information display apparatus that can communicate with a mobile phone possessed by a player.

JP 2013-226339 A

  In the information display device disclosed in Patent Document 1, the mobile phone acquires the game history collected by the information display device, so that the player can view his / her game history on the mobile phone. However, in the present invention, since the player can acquire only the same type of game history from any information display device, there is a problem that the individual game history corresponding to the type of gaming machine cannot be viewed. It was.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and the object of the present invention is to enable a player to view a personal game history corresponding to the type of gaming machine on a player terminal. It is in.

  The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems. In addition, although the code | symbol used in description of the form for implementing invention mentioned later and drawing is added for reference, the component of this invention is not limited to what attached | subjected this code | symbol.

The invention according to means 1
Information display device (data display) provided for game machines (pachinko machine 200A, encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, slot machine, game point system slot machine, etc.) and capable of displaying game history (number of big hits, number of bonuses, etc.) Device 400, paging lamp device 900, card unit 300, etc.) and a player terminal (mobile phone 16A, notebook computer 15A, tablet terminal, PDA, etc.) possessed by a player who plays with the gaming machine. (The first gaming system 1A to the sixth gaming system 1F, etc.),
The information display device includes:
Settings (game machine model, type, genre, loan rate, manufacturer, etc.) settings according to the type of gaming machine (game machine model, type, genre, loan rate, manufacturer, etc.), aggregation of game history Setting means (setting of output of game history) (processing section of information display device),
It is a personal game history from the start to the end of the game by the player in the corresponding gaming machine, and a common common personal game history (pachinko machine: number of individual jackpots, number of consecutive resorts, regardless of the setting of the setting means, Slot machine: individual bonus times, etc., and specific personal game history (pachinko machine: individual ST remaining prescribed number of withdrawals, ST remaining prescribed number of withdrawals, ST withdrawal rate, short withdrawals) Number of times, maximum round probability variation per consecutive resort, latent probability variation count, probability variation hit ratio, falling rate, non-falling rate, V winning shortest rotation speed, V winning average rotation speed, etc. Slot machine: Personal bonus (BB, RB) is generated Number of times, bonus rate, chance time (ART, RT, AT) frequency, chance time rate, etc.) And specific personal game history itself, the common personal game history and can output output means of code, etc.) which encodes the unique personal game history (display unit of the information display device, a communication unit),
With
The player terminal can display the common individual game history and the specific individual game history specified from the specific information output by the output means (the common personal game history and the specific individual game history are displayed on the display unit of the player terminal). This is a gaming system characterized by being capable of display.
According to this, the player acquires not only a common common personal game history regardless of the type of gaming machine corresponding to the information display device, but also a specific personal gaming history that differs depending on the type of gaming machine corresponding to the information display device. It is possible for the player to view the personal game history corresponding to the type of gaming machine on the player terminal.

The invention according to means 2
A gaming system according to means 1, comprising:
An information distribution device (external server 700, hall computer 600, etc.) capable of communicating with the player terminal;
When the player terminal receives the specific information output from the output means, the terminal specific information (common personal game that can specify the common personal game history and the specific personal game history specified from the specific information) A history and a specific personal game history itself, a common personal game history and a specific personal game history are transmitted from the information display device or the management device to the information distribution device,
The information distribution device displays the common individual game history and the specific individual game history specified from the terminal specification information transmitted from the player terminal in a specific mode (display mode according to the type of gaming machine). Generating means for generating display data (such as portable display data) (processing section of the information distribution device), and distributing the display data generated by the generating means to the player terminal,
The player terminal is a gaming system that displays the common individual game history and the specific individual game history in the specific mode using display data distributed from the information distribution device.
According to this, when the player terminal receives the specific information output from the information display device, the terminal specific information that can specify the common personal game history and the specific personal game history specified from the specific information is information. It is possible to obtain from the information distribution device display data for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history specified from the terminal specifying information in a specific mode, transmitted to the distribution device. As a result, the player can view the common personal game history and the specific personal game history displayed in the specific mode on the player terminal.

The invention according to means 3 is
A gaming system according to means 1, comprising:
The information display device generates display data (portable display data, etc.) for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history in a specific mode (display mode according to the type of gaming machine). Means (processing section of the information display device),
The output means outputs display data generated by the generating means to the player terminal,
The player terminal is a game system characterized in that the common personal game history and the specific personal game history are displayed in the specific manner by using display data output from the information display device.
According to this, the information display device generates display data for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history in a specific manner, and the player terminal acquires the display data from the information display device. It becomes possible. As a result, the player can view the common personal game history and the specific personal game history displayed in the specific mode on the player terminal.

The invention according to means 4 is
A gaming system according to means 1, comprising:
An information distribution device (external server 700, hall computer 600, etc.) capable of communicating with the player terminal;
The output means outputs the specific information to the information distribution device,
The information distribution device generates display data (such as portable display data) for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history specified from the specific information output by the output means in a specific manner. Comprising a generating means (processing section of the information distribution device), distributing display data generated by the generating means to the player terminal;
The player terminal is a gaming system that displays the common individual game history and the specific individual game history in the specific mode using display data distributed from the information distribution device.
According to this, the information distribution device generates display data for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history in a specific manner based on the specific information output from the information display device, and the player terminal Can acquire the display data from the information distribution apparatus. As a result, the player can view the common personal game history and the specific personal game history displayed in the specific mode on the player terminal.

The invention according to means 5 is
A gaming system according to any one of means 1 to 4, comprising:
A management device (such as the hall computer 600) that can individually distribute type setting information corresponding to the type of gaming machine corresponding to the plurality of information display devices to the plurality of information display devices,
The setting means is a gaming system that performs setting according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine based on the type setting information distributed from the management device.
According to this, since the type of gaming machine corresponding to each of the plurality of information display devices can be collectively set on the management device side, convenience on the store side can be improved. Further, the information display device can easily perform setting according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine based on the type setting information distributed from the management device.

The invention according to means 6 is
A gaming system according to any one of means 1 to 5, wherein
The gaming machine has a plurality of models (pachinko machine model, slot machine model),
The setting means is a gaming system characterized in that the type of the gaming machine can be set.
According to this, in the information display device, it is possible to set the type of the corresponding gaming machine. In addition, by displaying the game history corresponding to the set model, not only the player's willingness to play can be increased, but also the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

The invention according to means 7
A gaming system according to any one of means 1 to 5, wherein
There are a plurality of specified types of gaming machines (pachinko machine type: jackpot probability band type, classification type, slot machine type: normal type, ART type, RT type, AT type, etc.)
The setting means is a gaming system characterized in that setting for each type of the gaming machine is possible.
According to this, in the information display device, it becomes possible to perform setting according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine. In addition, by displaying the game history corresponding to the set type, not only the player's willingness to play can be increased, but also the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

The invention according to means 8 is
A gaming system according to any one of means 1 to 7, comprising:
The specific individual game history includes a plurality of types of information,
The output means is a game system characterized in that the specific information capable of specifying some types of information in the specific individual game history can be output.
According to this, the information display device not only outputs specific information that can specify all types of information included in the specific personal game history, but also specifies some types of information included in the specific personal game history. Possible specific information can also be output.

The invention according to means 9 is
A gaming system according to means 8, comprising:
Further comprising a specifying means (an operation unit of the information display device, an operation unit of the player terminal) for the player to specify the type of information to be acquired from the specific individual game history,
The output means can output the specific information that can specify the type of information specified by the specifying means.
According to this, the information display device can output specific information capable of specifying the type of information designated as the acquisition target by the player among the multiple types of information included in the specific individual game history. User convenience can be improved.

The invention according to means 10 is
A gaming system according to any one of means 1 to 9, wherein
The gaming machine has a plurality of models,
The player terminal includes a storage unit (a storage unit of the player terminal) capable of storing the personal game history in a cumulative manner, and based on the personal game history stored in the storage unit, the same type of gaming machine It is a game system characterized by being able to display the specific individual game history related to the game.
According to this, in the player terminal, it becomes possible for the player to browse a specific personal game history related to the same type of gaming machine, not only can increase the player's willingness to play, but also the operation of the gaming machine. The rate can also be improved.

The invention according to means 11 is
A gaming system according to any one of means 1 to 9, wherein
There are a plurality of specified types of gaming machines (pachinko machine type: jackpot probability band type, classification type, slot machine type: normal type, ART type, RT type, AT type, etc.)
The player terminal includes a storage unit (a storage unit of the player terminal) capable of storing the personal game history in a cumulative manner, and based on the personal game history stored in the storage unit, the same type of gaming machine It is a game system characterized by being able to display the specific individual game history related to the game.
According to this, in the player terminal, it becomes possible for the player to browse a specific personal game history relating to the same type of gaming machine, not only increasing the player's gaming motivation, but also operating the gaming machine. The rate can also be improved.

The invention according to means 12 is
Information display device (data display) provided for game machines (pachinko machine 200A, encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, slot machine, game point system slot machine, etc.) and capable of displaying game history (number of big hits, number of bonuses, etc.) Device 400, calling lamp device 9, card unit 300, etc.)
Settings (game machine model, type, genre, loan rate, manufacturer, etc.) settings according to the type of gaming machine (game machine model, type, genre, loan rate, manufacturer, etc.), aggregation of game history Setting means (setting of output of game history) (processing section of information display device),
It is a personal game history from the start to the end of the game by the player in the corresponding gaming machine, and a common common personal game history (pachinko machine: number of hits per person, number of consecutive resorts, etc.) regardless of the setting of the setting means , Slot machine: individual bonus times, etc.) and specific personal game history (pachinko machine: individual ST remaining number of withdrawals, ST remaining number of withdrawals, ST withdrawal rate, time reduction depending on the setting means setting) Number of pull-backs, maximum round probability variation hits, number of latent probability variations, probability variation hit ratio, drop rate, non-fall rate, V winning shortest rotation speed, V winning average rotation speed, slot machine: individual bonus (BB, RB) Specific information (common personal game) that can specify the occurrence frequency, bonus occurrence rate, chance time (ART, RT, AT) occurrence frequency, chance time occurrence rate, etc.) Gravel and unique personal game history itself, the common personal game history and can output output means of code, etc.) which encodes the unique personal game history (display unit of the information display device, a communication unit),
It is an information display device characterized by comprising.
According to this, it is possible to output a common personal game history that is common regardless of the type of gaming machine corresponding to the information display device, and a specific personal game history that varies depending on the type of gaming machine corresponding to the information display device. For example, by outputting these game histories to a player terminal possessed by the player, the player can acquire his / her own game history, and the player can obtain an individual game history corresponding to the type of the gaming machine. It is possible to browse on the player terminal.

The invention according to means 13 is
An information display device described in means 12, comprising:
Generation means for generating display data (such as portable display data) for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history in a specific mode (display mode according to the type of gaming machine) A processing unit),
The output means is an information display device that outputs display data generated by the generation means.
According to this, it is possible to generate display data for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history in a specific manner.

The invention according to means 14 is
An information display device described in means 12, comprising:
The output means is an information distribution device (external server 700, hall computer 600, etc.) that can communicate with a player terminal (mobile phone 16A, notebook computer 15A, tablet terminal, PDA, etc.) possessed by a player who plays with the gaming machine. ) To output the specific information.
According to this, by outputting specific information to an information distribution device communicable with a player terminal possessed by a player who plays with a gaming machine, a common individual game history and a specific individual game for distribution to the player terminal History display data can be generated by the information distribution apparatus.

The invention according to means 15 is
An information display device according to any one of means 12 to 14,
The setting means is based on the type setting information (total setting data 693 and the like) distributed from a management device (such as the hall computer 600) capable of distributing type setting information corresponding to the type of the corresponding gaming machine. The information display device is characterized in that a setting is made according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine.
According to this, since the types of gaming machines corresponding to the information display device can be collectively set by the management device, convenience on the store side can be improved. Further, the information display device can easily perform setting according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine based on the type setting information distributed from the management device.

The invention according to means 16 is
An information display device according to any one of means 12 to 15, comprising:
The gaming machine has a plurality of models (pachinko machine model, slot machine model),
The setting means is an information display device capable of setting the type of the gaming machine.
According to this, it becomes possible to set the type of the corresponding gaming machine. In addition, by displaying the game history corresponding to the set model, not only the player's willingness to play can be increased, but also the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

The invention according to means 17 is
An information display device according to any one of means 12 to 15, comprising:
There are a plurality of specified types of gaming machines (pachinko machine type: jackpot probability band type, classification type, slot machine type: normal type, ART type, RT type, AT type, etc.)
The information display device is characterized in that the setting means can be set for each type of gaming machine.
According to this, it becomes possible to perform setting according to the type of a corresponding gaming machine. In addition, by displaying the game history corresponding to the set type, not only the player's willingness to play can be increased, but also the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

The invention according to means 18 is
An information display device according to any one of means 12 to 17, comprising:
The specific individual game history includes a plurality of types of information,
The output means is an information display device capable of outputting the specific information capable of specifying some types of information in the specific individual game history.
According to this, in addition to outputting specific information that can specify all types of information included in the specific personal game history, specific information that can specify some types of information included in the specific personal game history Can also be output.

The invention according to means 19 is
An information display device described in means 18, comprising:
Further comprising a specifying means (operation unit of the information display device) for the player to specify the type of information to be acquired from the specific individual game history,
The information display device is characterized in that the output means can output the specific information that can specify the type of information designated by the designation means.
According to this, it becomes possible to output specific information that can specify the type of information specified by the player among the multiple types of information included in the specific individual game history, and improve the convenience of the player Can do.

The invention according to means 20 is
An information display device according to any one of means 13 to 19, comprising:
Game machines (pachinko machine 200A, encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, slot machine, game points) that a player can play using the game value (the number of saved game media, the number of local counting game media, the number of game games saved on the day, the number of local game points) System slot machine),
The display means is capable of displaying an image;
When the assigned game value (the number of game media saved on the day, the number of game media counted locally, the number of game games saved on the day, the number of local game points) reaches a first value (first display threshold), a predetermined image (dollar box, thousands of boxes, balls) Display control for causing the display means to display a gradual display of bulk and a gradual display of medal bulk), and when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the assigned game value is the first value. Even if the number is less than the first value, a predetermined number of minutes (difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold: for example, 125 balls that are the number of game balls paid out once, one game medal payout The predetermined image is not hidden if it reaches a small second value (first non-display threshold) that is the number 50 or a predetermined set value), and the predetermined image is displayed when the predetermined value falls below the second value. Image display that can perform non-display control to hide the image An information display apparatus further comprising a control unit (processing unit of the information display device).
According to this, by displaying a predetermined image based on the assigned game value, it is possible to realize an intuitively easy-to-understand display showing the assigned game value and the game state of the player. Further, the second value for hiding the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being frequently switched due to increase / decrease in the assigned game value just before the threshold.

The invention according to means 21 is
An information display device described in means 20, comprising:
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 200A, enclosed pachinko machine 200B, slot machine) that can be played using a game medium,
The game system further comprises counting means (counting payout unit 380) capable of counting the number of game media granted as the number of game media given to the player as the game value to be given.
The image display control means is an information display device that executes the display control and the non-display control based on the number of game media counted by the counting means.
According to this, based on the counting result of the counting means, display control / non-display control of the predetermined image according to the number of granted game media can be appropriately performed.

The invention according to means 22
An information display device described in means 21, comprising:
The game medium is paid back to the player within the range of the number of granted game media (for the game medium refund by the control of the card unit 300, the game medium refund by the nozzle, the game media lending operation in the game point type slot machine) A payout control means (counting payout unit 380) for performing control for
The granted game medium number counting means includes an accepted game medium number counting means (counting sensor of the count payout unit 380) capable of counting the number of received game media, and the counting result of the accepted game medium number counting means and the payout The information display device is characterized in that the number of granted game media is updated based on the number of payouts (the number of payouts of game balls or game medals) by the control means.
According to this, it is possible to accurately count the number of granted game media by updating the number of granted game media based on the received game media count result and the number of game media payouts, and display control of a predetermined image / Hide control can be performed accurately.

The invention according to means 23 is
An information display device described in means 20, comprising:
A signal receiving means (third communication unit 485) for receiving a signal capable of specifying the assigned gaming value;
The image display control means is an information display device that performs the display control and the non-display control based on a signal received by the signal receiving means.
According to this, it is possible to perform display control / non-display control of a predetermined image according to the granted game value based on the signal that can specify the assigned game value.

The invention according to means 24 is
An information display device described in means 23,
The signal that can specify the assigned game value is intermittent timing (timing at predetermined time intervals, timing when the counting result of the counting payout unit 380 reaches a predetermined number, and predetermined time after the counting payout unit 380 stops counting). When the time has passed, the count is finalized, and it is sent at
The image display control unit is an information display device that performs the display control and the non-display control based on a signal transmitted at the intermittent timing received by the reception unit.
According to this, the display / non-display of the predetermined image is frequently switched by executing the display control and non-display control of the predetermined image based on the signal that can specify the assigned game value transmitted at intermittent timing. This can be prevented.

The invention according to means 25 is
An information display device according to any one of means 20 to 24, comprising:
During the display of the predetermined image, the image display control means determines whether the assigned game value is a predetermined opportunity (pachinko machine 200 or a slot machine with a single payout of game balls or medals, a game point type slot machine). The number of game values to be reduced (125 balls that are one payout of game balls, 50 coins that are one payout of game medals), The predetermined number of points set based on the number of points deducted per game (200 balls with a margin of 125 game balls, 75 with a margin of 50 game medals, 75 points deducted per time In the information display device, the non-display control is performed to hide the predetermined image when the value falls below the second value smaller than the first value. is there.
According to this, the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value can be optimized by being based on the number by which the assigned game value decreases at a predetermined opportunity. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being frequently switched due to increase / decrease in the assigned game value just before the threshold.

The invention according to means 26 is
An information display device according to any one of means 20 to 25, wherein
The image display control means performs a step display update (increasing the display number of dollar boxes, increasing the display step number of ball bulk or medal bulk) to update the display of the predetermined image step by step according to the assigned game value. Is possible,
It is possible to specify the display stage of the displayed predetermined image (update the display counter value according to the display stage, add a first non-display threshold to a predetermined reference game medium number (for example, an integral multiple of the first display threshold) The display flag is set based on the number of display units), and storage means (RAM 330, storage unit 490: first display counter value, display flag) is further provided.
The image display control means is configured to display the predetermined image in the stage display update (display the number of dollar boxes, the ball volume and the medal volume based on the display stage and the assigned game value stored in the storage means. It is an information display device characterized by determining the number of stages).
According to this, by storing the display stage of the displayed predetermined image in an identifiable manner, particularly when the predetermined number of game media is a number between the first value and the second value, the predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to be displayed.

The invention according to means 27 is
An information display device according to any one of means 20 to 26,
The image display control means hides the predetermined image when the given game value reaches a third value (second display threshold) that is larger than the first value (dollar box, thousand box, ball bulk, Display control for displaying a second predetermined image (a special box, a box, a new ball volume and a medal volume in a stepwise manner) different from the predetermined image). It is an information display device characterized by being able to execute.
According to this, since the second predetermined image can be newly displayed after the predetermined image is not displayed in accordance with the increase of the granted game value, the display width can be further expanded.

The invention according to means 28 is
An information display device according to any one of means 20 to 26,
The image display control means continues the display of the predetermined image (dollar box, thousands of boxes, ball bulk) when the assigned game value reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value. Display control for displaying a second predetermined image (special box, box, new ball size and medal volume stepwise display) different from the predetermined image). The information display device is characterized by being executable.
According to this, since the predetermined image can be continuously displayed and the second predetermined image can be newly displayed in accordance with the increase of the granted game value, the display width can be further expanded.

The invention according to means 29 is
An information display device described in means 27 or 28,
When the second predetermined image is displayed, the image display control means has a predetermined number of game values more than the third value (the difference between the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold). : For example, 125 balls that are paid out for a single game ball, 200 balls that have a certain margin, 50 balls that are a single payout of game medals, and a certain margin for this If the fourth predetermined value (75 or a predetermined set value) has reached a small fourth value (second non-display threshold), the second predetermined image is not hidden and the second value is below the fourth value. An information display device characterized by being capable of executing non-display control for making a predetermined image non-displayable.
According to this, a 2nd predetermined image can be newly displayed according to the increase in a provision game value. The fourth value for hiding the second predetermined image is smaller by a second predetermined number than the third value for displaying the second predetermined image. By providing the difference between the third value and the fourth value for the second predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the second predetermined image from being frequently switched due to increase / decrease in the assigned game value just before the threshold. Can do.

The invention according to means 30 is
An information display device described in means 29, wherein
When the predetermined image is displayed, the image display control means has the given game value that is more than the first value by the predetermined number (the difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold: When the number of game balls is 200, the number of game medals is 75, or a predetermined first set value) is smaller than the second value, the non-display control is executed, and the second predetermined image is displayed. Sometimes, the given game value is set to a value larger than the difference between the first value and the second value (the difference between the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold: For example, when the number of game balls is 400, the number of game medals is 150, or a predetermined second setting value) is less than the fourth value smaller than the second value, the second non-display control is executed. Is an information display device characterized by
According to this, the second predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the third value and the fourth value is larger than the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value. For this reason, the second predetermined image can be made less likely to be hidden compared to the predetermined image.

It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 1st game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information and signal in a 1st game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance structure of one pachinko machine and an inter-counter counting unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance structure of another pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of an inter-counter counting unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for a display content setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the display setting table at the time of simultaneous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for a 1st display part display mode setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for characteristic game history display mode setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the 2nd display part display mode setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for total game history information totalization. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of a comprehensive game history database. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of a personal game history database. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the setting data for a display. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the setting data for totalization. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the housing of the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the threshold value table for special image displays. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a management process. It is a continuation of the management process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of an individual game history information total process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a display process. This is a continuation of the display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special image display process. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of a special image display. It is a figure which shows an example of a special image display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a special image display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a special image display screen. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a counter-counting unit process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a portable terminal process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a 1st display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a 1st display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a 1st display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a 2nd display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of a 2nd special image display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 2nd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information and signal in a 1st game system. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of an external server. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of an external server process. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information and signal in a 3rd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 4th game system. It is a figure which shows the flow of the information and signal in a 4th game system. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a ball management computer. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of member management data. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of card | curd management data. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of unit management data. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of a card unit process. It is a continuation of the card unit processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a holding ball total process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a holding ball division | segmentation process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 5th game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the recording area of a common member card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of storage ball number management data. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a game hall member information table and a game history table classified by member. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of the various tables for management of a common member. Explanatory drawing in the case of newly issuing a common member card and accepting member registration. Explanatory drawing in the case of accepting member registration from the player who has a common member card. Explanatory drawing in the case of performing membership registration using a common membership card in a card unit. It is a front view which shows an example of the external appearance structure of a sealing system pachinko machine and a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a sealing system pachinko machine and a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game information of the own shop displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus, and another shop. It is a figure which shows an example of the game type | mold total graph displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the game type | mold total graph displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of a firing intensity threshold range table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the passage area data according to discharge intensity. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the implantation area | region data classified by discharge intensity. It is a figure which shows an example of the total graph according to discharge intensity displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the code | cord | chord displayed on a calling lamp apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the special image screen displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for light emission setting. It is a figure which shows the variation of delivery of the data for portable display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the table for special game history information totalization. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game system.

  Hereinafter, an example of a preferred embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. However, embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the embodiments described below.

[1. First Embodiment]
[1-1. Game system configuration]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a first gaming system 1A according to the first embodiment.
The first gaming system 1A is a type of a plurality of pachinko machines 200A that are a type of gaming machine installed on a game island (not shown), and a gaming device and an information display device that are provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 200A. A data display device 400, an inter-counter counting unit 500 which is a kind of gaming device and recording medium processing device provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 200A, a hall computer 600 which is a kind of management device, A ball management computer 800, which is a kind of management device for managing the number of stored balls and the number of possessed balls, and a mobile phone 16A possessed by the player are configured.

  The pachinko machine 200A in the present embodiment can be played using a game ball (pachinko ball) that is a kind of game medium, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed and displayed. A variable display means (for example, a special symbol display) for deriving and displaying the result, and a specific game advantageous to the player when the display result derived and displayed on the variable display means becomes a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) This is a gaming machine controlled to a state (for example, a big hit gaming state).

  The pachinko machine 200A is a kind of gaming machine, and is arranged side by side on a plurality of game islands (not shown) in the store's game hall, and a player can play a game using pachinko balls as a game medium. It is configured to be possible. The pachinko machine 200A according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of pachinko machines 200A.

  Specifically, as the type of the pachinko machine 200A, the type according to the model (model a, model b, model c, etc.) of the pachinko machine 200A, the type according to the type (type by jackpot probability band, type by category, etc.) , The type according to the genre of the pachinko machine 200A (genre according to the tie-up source, genre according to the theme of the pachinko machine, etc.), the unit price of the pachinko ball when the player plays with the pachinko machine 200A (so-called loan rate) For example, there are types corresponding to 4 yen pachinko, 2 yen pachinko, 1 yen pachinko, etc. (hereinafter simply referred to as “unit price for lending”), types according to the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 200A, and the like.

The types of the pachinko machine 200A include a jackpot probability band type and a section type.
Types classified by type are the first type (so-called digipachi), the second type (so-called blade mono), the first type / two-type mixer, the probability changer (ST type, non-ST type, falling lottery type, etc.), non-probability changer ( This is a type according to the category of the pachinko machine 200A, such as V winning type).

  The big hit probability band type is a type according to the numerical range to which the big hit probability of the pachinko machine 200A belongs, and includes types such as max type, middle type, light middle type, light type (sweet digital type), minimum type. .

The max type is a type to which the pachinko machine 200A whose hit probability is close to the upper limit hit probability (1/400) determined for the current pachinko machine, for example, the hit probability is 1/399, 1/397, 1 / A pachinko machine 200A such as 394 is included in this type.
The middle type is a type to which a pachinko machine 200A having a slightly higher hit probability than the max type belongs. For example, a pachinko machine 200A having a jackpot probability of around 1/300 is included in this type.
The light middle type is a type to which a pachinko machine 200A whose jackpot probability is an intermediate probability between the light type and middle type belongs, and includes, for example, a pachinko machine 200A having a jackpot probability of 1/120 to 1/220. .
The light type (sweet digital type) is a type to which the pachinko machine 200A having a jackpot probability of about 1/100 belongs.
The minimum type is a type to which a pachinko machine 200A having a jackpot probability of about 1/50 belongs.

  The genre of the pachinko machine 200A includes a genre corresponding to the tie-up source of the pachinko machine 200A (for example, cartoon, anime, game, movie, special effects action, drama, historical drama, music, horror, variety, quiz, etc.) Genres (image theme, motif, theme, optimism, theme, etc.) corresponding to the theme of 200A are included.

  The pachinko machine 200A is provided corresponding to a recording medium processing device such as a card unit 300 and an inter-counter counting unit 500 described later (here, adjacent to the right side of the recording medium processing device), and the corresponding recording medium processing device. Is a so-called CR-type pachinko machine that pays out and lends game balls from the pachinko machine 200A in accordance with various processes such as a ball lending process performed by the recording medium processing apparatus. The pachinko machine 200A is arranged according to the model and the like on the amusement island provided in the store, and is configured to be individually identifiable by a unique machine number.

  At a predetermined position above each pachinko machine 200A, a data display device 400 that displays various information such as game information related to games on the pachinko machine 200A and store information related to store sales is installed by a color liquid crystal screen. Yes. The data display device 400 has two display units, a first display unit 430 and a second display unit 440, as will be described later, and displays different data in the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440, respectively. . Since the data display device 400 is a terminal that exposes information to a player or a player, it can also be called an information disclosure terminal.

  In the present embodiment, the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400 is configured to include the touch panel 421, and the call icon, menu icon, and version information icon displayed on the first display unit 430 are displayed on the player. By tapping, it is possible to call a store clerk, select a menu (wagon service, hand towel, meal break, etc.), and instruct to display the version information of the pachinko machine 200A. Therefore, the data display device 400 can be rephrased as a calling lamp device.

  In the present embodiment, the data display device 400 includes a “common game history” that is a common game history regardless of the type of the pachinko machine 200A, and a “specific game history” that is a unique game history that differs depending on the type of the pachinko machine 200A. And the game history can be displayed. In addition, the game history includes “total game history” which is a comprehensive game history related to games on the corresponding pachinko machine 200A on the business day, and games played by a player who plays on the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the business day. “Individual game history” which is a game history from the start to the end is included.

  The total game history is a total game history of all the players who have played with the pachinko machine 200A, regardless of who played the game and how many players played the game. It means the game history that is tabulated. On the other hand, the personal game history is a personal game history of a player who has played with the pachinko machine 200A, and means a game history that is tabulated for each player. That is, it can be said that the total game history is a game history focusing on the gaming machine, and the individual game history is a game history focusing on the individual player.

  Further, the start of the game means the timing at which each player starts the game when a plurality of players play the game with the pachinko machine 200A, and the end of the game means the respective player. Means the timing when the game ends. A specific method for the data display device 400 to specify the start and end of the game will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the common game history includes a “common general game history” that is a common general game history and a “common personal game history” that is a common personal game history. The specific game history includes a “specific general game history” that is a specific general game history and a “specific personal game history” that is a specific individual game history.

  Here, the common meaning in the common game history can be a broad concept. For example, a concept including a game history common to all pachinko machines 200A can be adopted. The game history common to all the pachinko machines 200A can include information such as the number of game balls fired, the number of fluctuations (the number of rotations), the number of jackpots, and the like.

  Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a concept including a game history common to some of the pachinko machines 200A, instead of a game history common to all the pachinko machines 200A. In this case, the type of big hit of the pachinko machine 200A (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, big hit without normal / probable variation distinction), big hit distribution (various big hit distribution (ratio), big hit round number distribution (ratio)) , Various types of pachinko machine 200A by type (probability changing machine (ST type, non-ST type, falling lottery type, etc.), non-probable changing machine (V winning type, etc.)), and pachinko machine 200A big hit band type (spec) Based on the elements, the pachinko machines 200A having some of the above elements in common are regarded as a group of pachinko machines 200A, and items that can be tabulated in common with these groups of pachinko machines 200A are aggregated as a common game history. It may be.

  Moreover, although it is a broader concept, items that can be tabulated in common with completely different gaming machines (for example, pachinko machines and slot machines) may be tabulated as a common gaming history. Pachinko machines and slot machines use different game media and ways of playing games, but in both pachinko machines and slot machines, the player can change the special symbols using the game media and change the special symbols. This is common in that when the display result of the display becomes a specific display result, a privilege (a big hit with a pachinko machine, a bonus or a chance time with a slot machine) is given to the player. For this reason, items such as the number of bonus grants and the number of fluctuations can be totaled as a game history common to these different gaming machines.

  As described above, it is possible to aggregate items that can be aggregated in common with these groups of gaming machines as a common gaming history, with gaming machines having overlapping items that can be aggregated as gaming histories as a group of gaming machines. If items that can be aggregated as game histories overlap, they can be aggregated as a common game history.

  In the present embodiment, paying attention to the big hit type among the above elements, paying attention to the type of pachinko machine 200A that performs two types of big hit lottery, ie, the probable big hit and the normal big hit, are common to these types of pachinko machines 200A. It is assumed that items such as the probability variation big hit count and the normal big hit count are tabulated as a common game history.

  On the other hand, the specific game history means a game history specific to the type of the pachinko machine 200A, and includes a game history including items that can be tabulated only by the type of the pachinko machine 200A (if the type of the pachinko machine 200 is unique) Game history). The information to be tabulated as the specific game history can be basically information based on an event that is beneficial to the player. Specific examples of events that are beneficial to the player will be described later in this embodiment and other embodiments (modifications).

  The data display device 400 includes setting means for performing setting according to the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200A. The setting performed by the data display device 400 means that the operation of the device itself is determined so as to perform an operation according to the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200A. More specifically, the setting means is configured to be able to perform settings according to the model and type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200A.

  In the present embodiment, different game history information is totaled according to the type of the pachinko machine 200 including the model and type of the pachinko machine 200A, and different game history information is displayed according to the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200. It is configured to be able to do. That is, the data display device 400 is configured to be able to perform an operation according to the type and type of the pachinko machine 200A. In the setting according to the type of the pachinko machine 200A, the aggregation setting of which aggregation items are aggregated as the game history according to the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200 and how the aggregation items of the aggregated game history are set. Display setting of whether to display.

  In the present embodiment, the data display device 400 sets the model of the pachinko machine 200 as an example of a setting according to the type of the pachinko machine 200 based on the setting data for aggregation and the setting data for display output from the hall computer 600. A description will be given assuming that the corresponding setting is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the data display device 400 displays the aggregation setting for which aggregation items are aggregated as the game history according to the model of the pachinko machine 200, and how the aggregation items of the aggregated gaming history are displayed. Display settings.

  In addition to the model and type of the pachinko machine 200A, it is also possible to make settings (aggregation settings and display settings) for determining the operation of the data display device 400 for each pachinko machine 200A. Therefore, generally speaking, it can be said that the data display device 400 is configured to be able to perform settings according to the pachinko machine 200A (settings according to the gaming machine).

  The various game histories described above include a plurality of types of information as will be described later. The comprehensive game history information including a plurality of types of information is referred to as “game history information”. In the present embodiment, the data display device 400 aggregates game history information based on game signals output from the pachinko machine 200A. The game signal includes signals such as a jackpot signal, a probability change signal, a short-time signal, a driving signal, a winning ball signal, a starting signal, etc., which will be described later.

  The data display device 400 does not count game history information based on game signals output from the pachinko machine 200A, but possessed balls output from units such as the inter-counter counting unit 500 and a card unit 300 described later. The game history information may be aggregated based on unit signals such as the number and card insertion / discharge signals indicating insertion / discharge of gaming cards. Further, the game history information may be totaled by using together the game signal output from the pachinko machine 200A and the unit signal output from the unit.

  The data display device 400 includes an output unit that outputs specific information that can specify the common personal game history and the specific personal game history. Here, the specific information is information that allows the external device to specify the common personal game history and the specific personal game history based on the specific information. In the present embodiment, the external device will be described as a mobile phone 16A possessed by a player.

  The specific information includes information such as common personal game history information and unique personal game history information that allows the mobile phone 16A to directly specify the personal game history from the information. In this case, the data display device 400 is configured to output (send) the personal game history information to the mobile phone 16A, and the mobile phone 16A acquires (receives) the personal game history information from the data display device 400.

  Further, the specific information includes information that allows the mobile phone 16A to indirectly specify the personal game history from the information. Specific information in this case includes, for example, code information encoded with personal game history information and code information encoded with URL information for accessing an information distribution apparatus that manages and distributes personal game history information in a database. Is included. Here, the code information includes information of a one-dimensional code (bar code) and a two-dimensional code (matrix type, stack type). In this case, the data display device 400 displays the code on the display unit, and the mobile phone 16A acquires the personal game history information by reading the code displayed on the display unit of the data display device 400 with a code reader.

  The inter-unit counting unit 500 is provided adjacent to the left side (or right side) of each pachinko machine and counts the number of pachinko balls paid out to the lower plate of the pachinko machine 200A. At the lowest position of the inter-counter counting unit 500, a counting payout unit 380, which will be described in detail later, is provided. The count payout unit 380 has a function of counting and taking pachinko balls, storing the counted pachinko balls, and returning a predetermined number of pachinko balls to the player according to a player's payout operation of the pachinko balls. Have.

  The hall computer 600 comprehensively manages each pachinko machine 200A installed in the store, and also manages the data display device 400 provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 200A. Specifically, information for display setting related to display on the display unit (first display unit 430 and second display unit 440) of each data display device 400 (setting information such as display contents, display conditions, and display mode) Is transmitted to the data display device 400, and the total setting information related to the aggregation of the game history information in the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400 (including the corresponding type setting information of the pachinko machine 200A) is data. By transmitting to the display device 400, the display setting in the data display device 400 and the total setting of the pachinko machine 200A are made possible.

  In addition, the hall computer 600 collects and manages game history information of each pachinko machine 200A installed in the store. Specifically, based on the game history data output from the data display device 400, the total game history information and the individual game history information are stored in a database, and the stored total game history information and individual game history information are output. It is configured to be possible. The output includes display output on the display unit of the hall computer 600, printing output to a printing apparatus connected to the hall computer 600, output to an external apparatus (for example, an external server 700 described later), and the like. It is.

  The ball management computer 800 records the number of balls counted in the inter-unit counting unit 500 (also referred to as a local counting ball number) and is recorded on a possession card that the player can use for a second game. Manage the number of balls you have.

  The mobile phone 16A is a kind of player terminal possessed by the player, and includes, for example, a smartphone. The mobile phone 16A is configured to include a code reader for reading a code displayed on the data display device 400, and the processing unit of the mobile phone 16A decodes the game history information from the code read by the code reader and decodes it. The game history information is stored in the storage unit. Further, it is conceivable that the player plays with a plurality of types of pachinko machines 200A. Therefore, the mobile phone 16A is configured to be able to store the personal game history information obtained by the player playing with each pachinko machine 200A in a storage unit.

  In addition, the processing unit of the mobile phone 16A is configured to be able to display the personal game history information stored cumulatively in the storage unit on the display unit in a specific display mode using a game history display application. Has been. Note that the functional configuration of the mobile phone 16A can be a conventionally known mobile phone or smartphone, and is not shown in the present embodiment.

[1-2. Information and signal flow]
FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of information and signal flows between the devices of the first gaming system 1A. In FIG. 2, illustration of the base terminal 1000 is omitted for simplicity of explanation.

  From the pachinko machine 200A, signals relating to the game such as a big hit signal, a probable change signal, a short time signal, a driving signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal are output to the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600.

  From the hall computer 600, display setting data which is setting data for display in the data display device 400, setting data for counting which is setting data for totaling game histories in the data display device 400, and simultaneous effects described later are data. Data and signals such as display instruction signals for causing the display device 400 to perform are transmitted to the data display device 400.

  From the data display device 400, general game history data that is data of the total game history and personal game history data that is data of the personal game history are output to the hall computer 600. The total game history data includes common total game history data that is common total game history data and specific total game history data that is specific total game history data. The personal game history data includes common personal game history data that is common personal game history data and specific personal game history data that is specific personal game history data.

  A card insertion / discharge signal is transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 500 to the data display device 400. Further, from the inter-unit counting unit 500, the number of possessed balls representing the number of balls counted by the player counted by the counting payout unit 380 is transmitted to the data display device 400. In the present embodiment, the inter-counter counting unit 500 is configured to output the number of possessed balls to the data display device 400 at intermittent timing.

  Here, the intermittent timing is not an arbitrary (real-time) timing, but, for example, a timing at a predetermined time interval, a timing at which the count result of the count payout unit 380 reaches a predetermined number, a count payout unit, or the like. It means the timing when the count is confirmed after a predetermined time has passed after the count of 380 is lost, and waiting for the confirmation.

  Here, the number of possessed balls is the number of game balls possessed (owned) by the player (also referred to as the number of possessed balls). For example, the player counts the number of locally counted balls counted by the counting payout unit 380. This is equivalent to the number of balls (the number of local counting balls + the number of storing balls, the number of local counting balls + the number of holding balls) obtained by adding the number of stored balls and holding balls already owned by. The local counting ball count is the counting ball count counted by the counting payout unit 380 and internally stored in the inter-unit counting unit 500, and cannot be directly grasped by a management device such as the ball management computer 800. It means the number of local counting balls. Further, the number of stored balls means the number of stored game media associated with the membership card managed by the ball management computer 800. The number of possessed balls means the number of stored game media associated with visitor cards managed by the ball management computer 800.

  In addition, what is necessary is just to let a local count ball number be the number of balls possessed by a player when the number of stored balls or the number of balls is not present. In addition, when there is no local counting number of balls, the number of balls stored or the number of balls may be used as the number of balls possessed by the player.

[1-3. Configuration of pachinko machine]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing an example of the external configuration of the pachinko machine 200A-1 with pachinko machine IDs (identification numbers) P1 to P20 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 4 shows the pachinko machine ID ( It is a front view which shows an example of the external appearance structure of the pachinko machine 200A-2 to which identification number) is P21-P40. The pachinko machine 200A-1 shown in FIG. 3 and the pachinko machine 200A-2 shown in FIG. 4 are different in model, and a model-specific game is possible.

  Hereinafter, the configurations of the P1-P20 pachinko machine 200A-1 shown in FIG. 3 and the P21-P40 pachinko machine 200A-2 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. An inter-counter counting unit 500 is installed adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 200A-1 and the pachinko machine 200A-2, but the inter-counter counting unit 500 is shown only in FIG. 3 and is not shown in FIG. To do.

  Moreover, although the P1 to P40 pachinko machine 200A is shown in the following example, there are a plurality of other types of pachinko machines 200A such as P41 to P60, P61 to P80, and the like. In this example, the pachinko machine ID is different for each “20”. However, the number of pachinko machine IDs assigned for each model may be different.

[1-3-1. P1-P20 pachinko machine configuration]
A pachinko machine 200A-1 shown in FIG. 3 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko machine 200A-1 has a glass door frame formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  There is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 on the lower surface of the glass door frame. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The game area 7 includes a left game area 7A (first game area) on the left side and a right game area 7B (second game area) on the right side when viewed from the top of the effect display device 9 provided in the center. The left game area 7 </ b> A that is the first game area and the right game area 7 </ b> B that is the second game area may be divided, for example, by the end face of the effect display device 9 or the arrangement of the game nails in the game area 7. When the game ball launched from the ball striking device and driven into the game area 7 is guided to the left game area 7A, the game ball is guided to the right game area 7B, for example, by being guided along the array of game nails. When it is impossible to guide or difficult to guide, and when it is guided to the right game area 7B, it is impossible to guide to the left game area 7A or difficult to guide by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

  In the left game area 7A, a left gate 32 is provided on the left side of the effect display device 9, and a first start winning opening 13a is provided below the effect display device 9. In the right game area 7B, a right gate 33 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9, and a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the effect display device 9.

  Here, the first start winning opening 13a is provided immediately below the effect display device 9. However, when the left-handed game ball is shot to aim at the left game area 7A, the game ball is easy to win, When the player hits the game area 7B and hits the game ball rightward, the game ball is difficult to win due to the arrangement of the game nails and the guide members 39a to 39c provided on the flow path of the game ball. The variable winning ball device 15 having the second start winning opening 13b is provided below the first starting winning opening 13a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the tilt control of the movable blade piece.

  In the pachinko machine 200A-1, a left gate 32 and a right gate 33 are provided in the left game area 7A and the right game area 7B, respectively, as passing areas through which game balls can pass. When the player is left-handed, the game ball passes through the left gate 32, so that the normal symbol variable display is started. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. It becomes a state and it can be expected that the game ball wins the second start winning opening 13b. In addition, when the player is making a right strike, the game ball passes through the right gate 33, whereby the variable display of the normal symbol is started. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Is opened, and it can be expected that the game ball will win the second start winning opening 13b. In other words, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be in an open state in both cases of left-handed and right-handed, so that the game ball wins the second start winning opening 13b. I can expect.

  Further, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened during the big hit gaming state. The special variable winning ball device 20 is arranged immediately below the variable winning ball device 15, but is in a position where the game ball guided by the guide member 39 b and the game nail 40 is easy to win when it is hit right.

  When the player is in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player cannot open the special variable winning ball device 20 and the variable winning ball device 15 is high even if the game ball is passed through the right gate 33. Since it is not released at a frequency, a left strike is made in which a game ball is shot aiming at the left game area 7A, and the game ball is awarded to the first start winning opening 13a. When the gaming state is a high base state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state), if the game ball is passed through the right gate 33, the variable winning ball device 15 is released at a high frequency. The player hits the game ball rightward aiming at the area 7B, and wins the game ball in the second start winning opening 13b. In the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, so that the right hitting the game ball is aimed at the right game area 7B and the special ball winning ball device 20 is won.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  When the display result of the symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is a big hit symbol (for example, a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right symbols are aligned in the same symbol), it becomes “big hit”, and the variable display state ends. In addition, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out of” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, which will be described later, and the second special symbol. There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the symbol variation display.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  A first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8 a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided at the lower right of the effect display device 9. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. A second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is displayed on the lower right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a). Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. In the present embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13a or the second start winning opening) After passing 13b (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning port 13a is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13a is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 14a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 13b through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13a. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 13b is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 15a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 13b (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 13b than the first starting winning port 13a. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 13b. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning opening 13a than the second starting winning opening 13b. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured so that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win).

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13a and the second start winning opening 13b may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 13b. The first start winning opening 13a is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning port 13a is further reduced, or the first start winning port is set. It is difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13a by arranging the nails densely around 13a, or to arrange the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 13a. The direction may be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13a.

  The pachinko machine 200A-1 is provided with the variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 13b. However, both the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b are provided. It is good also as a structure provided with the variable winning ball apparatus which performs an opening / closing operation | movement.

  Above the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13a, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) 4 is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising two displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, above the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 13b, that is, the second reserved memory number. 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In the pachinko machine 200A-1, the first reserved storage display unit 18c is in the lower left part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second reserved storage display unit 18d is in the lower right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Is provided. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the number of execution conditions that are not satisfied by the variable display start condition in each of the first special symbol display 18a and the second special symbol display 18b. In addition, you may make it provide in the display screen of the production | presentation display apparatus 9 the total pending | holding memory | storage display part which displays the total number (sum total pending | holding memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending | holding memory number and the 2nd pending | holding memory number.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the special symbol variation display transmits a variation pattern command that can identify the variation time, and the presentation control microcomputer 100 identifies the variation pattern command received. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol are executed in synchronization in principle.

  In the decorative part around the effect display device 9, there is provided a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 and moves forward of the effect display device 9 when the motor 86 rotates. For example, the movable member 78 notifies the player of the big hit by operating when the big hit symbol is stopped.

  Also, below the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23a.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When a game ball passes through the left gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, or when it passes through the right gate 33 and is detected by the second gate switch 33a, a random number (MR5) for hit determination based on the passage of the gate is extracted. Is done. The extracted random number for judgment is stored as normal symbol hold memory on the condition that the normal symbol hold memory number does not reach the upper limit (for example, 4), and the normal symbol hold memory number is incremented by 1 accordingly. The Then, the normal symbol display unit 10 is not subject to the fact that the normal symbol holding storage number is not 0, variable display of the normal symbol is not executed, and opening / closing control of the variable winning ball device 15 is not executed. The variable display of the display is started, and the normal symbol reserved storage number is subtracted by 1 accordingly.

  When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be won in the second start winning port 13b). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through either the left gate 32 or the right gate 33 is provided. The normal symbol hold memory display 41 lights up a number of LEDs corresponding to the number of normal symbol hold memories. Each time a game ball passes through the left gate 32 and the right gate 33, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switches 32a and 33a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  In the vicinity of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, winning holes 29a to 29d of the normal winning apparatus are provided. The gaming balls that have won the winning holes 29a to 29c are detected by the winning hole switch 30a, and the gaming balls that have won the winning hole 29d. Is detected by the winning opening switch 30b. Each of the winning holes 29a to 29d constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The first start winning opening 13a, the second starting winning opening 13b, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out-port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that emit sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left, right, top, and bottom of the outside of the game board 6. On the outer periphery of the game board 6, a top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c are provided. The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c are examples of decorative light emitters provided in the gaming machine.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  The gaming machine is provided with a ball hitting device (not shown) that hits the game ball and launches it into the game area 7 in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5. The hit ball launching device includes a launch motor (not shown) controlled by a circuit on a touch sensor substrate (not shown), and launches a game ball toward the game area 7 as the launch motor rotates. The touching of the player with the hitting operation handle 5 is detected by a touch sensor and a touch sensor circuit (a circuit including a detection circuit for detecting whether or not the player is touching the hitting operation handle 5). When the signal from the sensor circuit indicates an off state, the driving of the firing motor is stopped.

  The touch sensor substrate 91 is provided with a pulse generator that intermittently generates repeated pulses (pulse signals supplied to each phase of the firing motor as a stepping motor) and a single pulse generator that generates a single pulse. ing. When the signal from the touch sensor circuit indicates an on state, a pulse generated by the pulse generator is supplied to the firing motor. Further, a firing stop switch (not shown) is provided in the ball hitting operation handle 5 or in the vicinity of the ball hitting operation handle 5, and the pulse output of the pulse generator is stopped when the shot stop switch is operated.

  The pulse output of the pulse generator is also stopped when the firing control signal from the payout control board 37 is turned off. Further, the hitting ball launching device is provided with a single shot switch, and when the single shot switch is operated, a single pulse generated by the single pulse generator is supplied to the launch motor.

  In the example shown here, a pulse generator is provided on the touch sensor substrate, but the dispensing control substrate 37 may have a function of generating a pulse supplied to the firing motor. In that case, for example, the dispensing control microcomputer generates a pulse, and the generated pulse is relayed by the touch sensor substrate and supplied to the firing motor. Also, the output of the firing stop switch is input to the payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer is in a state where the lower pan is full or the supply ball is full, and when the output of the fire stop switch is turned off. Then, the pulse output is stopped.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher is a hitting hammer for hitting a game ball into the game area 7, a coil spring for biasing the hitting hammer, and a hitting hammer biased by the coil spring for releasing from the biased position. A cam mechanism is provided, and the cam mechanism is driven by a firing motor. Then, the biasing force of the spring is adjusted by changing the fixed position of the coil spring by the rotation of the hitting operation handle 5, and as a result, the force (launch strength) for hitting the game ball of the hitting hammer is adjusted.

  As a hitting ball launching device, there is a hitting motor that uses a stepping motor or a type that hits a game ball by directly fixing a hitting hammer to the shaft of a rotary solenoid. In such a configuration, the rotation angle (position) of the hitting operation handle 5 is detected by the variable resistor, and the operating speed of the stepping motor and the rotary solenoid as the drive source is increased according to the detection result. This adjusts the force (launch strength) for launching a game ball.

  In each of the above-described configurations, the firing strength operation means capable of adjusting the firing strength of the ball striking device corresponds to the rotatable ball striking operation handle 5. Note that the launch stop operation means capable of stopping the launch of the game ball by the hitting ball launcher corresponds to a launch stop switch.

  A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13a and is detected by the first start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13a. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 13b and is detected by the second start port switch 15a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 13b. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the big prize opening is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is notified that the opening of the big prize winning opening is finished and the big hit is finished.

  In the present embodiment, the low base state is a game state in which the game ball is not controlled so as to facilitate effective start winning at the start winning opening, and the high base state is a game ball that starts more than the low base state. The gaming state is controlled so that it is easy to make an effective start winning at the winning opening (for example, the variable display execution condition in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is easily established).

  In the present embodiment, the low probability state uses a determination value in the low probability state (a value in a range narrower than the determination value in the high probability state) as a big hit determination value in the big hit determination process at the start of special symbol variation. This is a state where the probability of a big hit is not raised. The high probability state is a state in which the judgment value at the time of the high probability state (a value in a wider range than the low probability state) is used as the jackpot judgment value in the jackpot judgment processing at the time of starting the special symbol variation. The state that is raised.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 starts variable display of a special symbol, it performs a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the display result is a jackpot symbol. Further, when it is determined that the display result is the big hit symbol in the big hit determination process, it is further determined whether the display result is the probability variation big hit symbol or the normal big hit symbol. That is, it is determined whether the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit.

  If the special symbol variable display result is a probable big hit symbol, the game state is shifted to the high probability / high base state at the end of the big hit gaming state, and the high probability / high base until the next big hit gaming state is started. The state continues. When the special symbol variable display result is a normal jackpot symbol, the gaming state is shifted to the low probability / high base state at the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, or The low probability / high base state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is started. If the game state is shifted to the low probability / high base state at the end of the big hit gaming state, and then the special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without starting the big hit gaming state, the subsequent gaming state is low. Probability / low base state.

  In the present embodiment, there are a low probability / low base state, a high probability / high base state, and a low probability / high base state as gaming states. In the following description, the low probability / low base state may be referred to as a normal state. In the normal state, the player strikes left and attempts to win a game ball in the first start winning opening 13a or the second starting winning opening 13b in the open state. In addition, in the big hit gaming state and the high base state (low probability / high base state, high probability / high base state), the player makes a right-hand hit, and the second winning prize opening or the second state that is opened in the big hit gaming state. An attempt is made to win a game ball in the start winning opening 13b.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 starts variable display of normal symbols, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a hit determination using a hit determination random number extracted when the game ball passes through the left gate 32 or the right gate 33. When it is determined that the winning is determined in the hit determination, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10 as a variable display result. The symbol 10 is derived and displayed as a variable display result on the device 10.

  Here, in the low base state (normal state), when the hit determination is executed or when the opening / closing control of the variable winning ball device 15 is executed, the normal state is determined to be a win at a ratio of 3/13 (10 In the case of determining that it is a hit, it is determined per short opening at a rate of 2/3, and it is determined per long opening at a rate of 1/3. In the case of per opening, the variable winning ball device 15 executes the release control for 0.5 seconds once, and in the case of the long opening, the variable winning ball device 15 executes the opening control for 5 seconds once. In the case of per short opening, the winning percentage to the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is low, and virtually no winning can be expected, whereas in the case of long opening, to the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Where the percentage of winning a prize is high and left-handed in a low base state Even, it is possible to expect the winning to the variable winning ball device 15. Here, the variation time of normal symbol has a 10 seconds in the normal state.

  On the other hand, in the high base state (low probability / high base state, high probability / high base state), when the hit determination is executed or when the opening / closing control of the variable winning ball device 15 is executed, 11 / A ratio of 13 is determined to be a hit, and a ratio of 2/13 is determined to be a shift. Further, when it is determined that the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 executes the opening control for 2.5 seconds twice. Therefore, when the player is making a right turn in the high base state, it is possible to expect winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the high base state is 1 second.

  As described above, in the high base state, the normal symbol shortening variation control in which the variation time (variable display time) of the normal symbol is shortened, the normal symbol probability variation control in which the probability that the variable symbol display result is a hit symbol is increased, And the opening / extension control is performed in which the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended based on the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Further, special symbol shortening variation control is performed in which the variation time (variable display time) of the special symbol is shortened. By executing these four controls in the high base state, it becomes easy to make an effective start winning at the second start winning opening 14.

  In other words, the normal symbol shortening variation control reduces the variation time of the normal symbol (for example, the variation time is 10 seconds when the normal symbol shortening variation control is not performed, whereas the normal symbol shortening variation control is performed. The frequency of the normal symbol change is increased, and as a result, the frequency of the normal symbol being hit is increased and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened. As a result, it becomes easier to make an effective start winning in the second starting winning opening 14. Further, the normal symbol probability change control increases the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 becomes a winning symbol (for example, the probability that the normal symbol probability change control is not executed is 3/13, whereas the normal symbol probability change control is performed). The probability that the control is executed becomes 11/13), the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and it is easy to make an effective start winning at the second start winning opening 14. In addition, the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is extended by the opening extension control (for example, the opening time when the opening extension control is not executed). Is 0.5 seconds × 1 time (0.5 seconds in total) or 5.0 seconds × 1 time (5 seconds in total), whereas the release time when the release extension control is executed is 2.5 It becomes easy to make an effective start winning in the second start winning opening 14 by making it 2 times × 2 times (5 seconds in total). Furthermore, the special symbol shortening variation control that shortens the special symbol variation time (variable display period) shortens the special symbol variation time, so the frequency of the special symbol variation is increased (in other words, The digestion of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation in which an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced to facilitate the effective start prize.

  In the present embodiment, in the high base state, the opening time in one opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is extended (from 0.5 seconds to 2.5 seconds), and the number of times of opening is increased ( In this example, the opening time in one opening / closing operation is extended so that the number of opening times does not change (for example, 5.0 seconds × 1 time). The opening time in each opening / closing operation may not be extended, and the number of opening times may be increased (for example, 0.5 seconds × 10 times). In any case, the total time for which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened increases as the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol.

  On the other hand, in the low base state in the present embodiment, in principle, none of the above-described normal symbol shortening variation control, normal symbol probability variation control, open extension control, and special symbol shortening variation control is executed. In this embodiment, the opening time for one opening / closing operation (5.0 seconds) in the case of long opening is short. In the example shown, the opening time in one opening / closing operation per opening is longer than the opening time (0.5 seconds) and the number of opening is the same (one time), but the opening time in one opening / closing operation is common. Thus, the number of times of opening may be increased (for example, 0.5 seconds × 10 times). In any case, the total time for which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases as the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 200A, the left gate 32 is provided in the left game area 7A, and a part of the game balls launched into the left game area 7A in the left-handed state is guided by a game nail disposed above the left gate 32. And passes through the left gate 32. In addition, a right gate 33 is provided in the right game area 7B, and a part of the game balls launched to the right game area 7B in the right-handed state are guided by game nails arranged above the right gate 33, Pass through the right gate 33.

  The game ball launched into the right game area 7B collides with the game nail disposed below the gate 32 and flows down while changing the course, but finally the guide member 39a disposed further below the gate 32. Alternatively, the variable winning ball device 15 is dropped by a high probability on the guiding surface (upper surface) of the guiding member 39b, and the guiding members 39a to 39c and the game nails arranged between the guiding member 39b and the variable winning ball device 15 are used. Be guided to. That is, most of the game balls launched into the right game area 7B are guided to the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Therefore, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball guided by the gaming nail wins the second start winning opening 13b with a high probability.

  The game balls guided by the guide members 39b and 39c and the game nails are further guided toward the special variable winning ball device 20 in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is not opened, and special if the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. The variable winning ball apparatus 20 is designed to win a large winning opening. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, if the player hits the right and puts the game ball into the right game area 7B, it can be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 20.

  In the present embodiment, the P1 to P20 pachinko machines 200A-1 play a game by firing a game ball in the left game area and winning in the first starting opening in the normal state which is a low probability low base state. In the high base state, a so-called right-handed pachinko machine that plays a game by firing a game ball in the right game area and winning in the second starting port is assumed.

  The display result of the variable symbol special display executed in the normal state (left-handed state) which is the low probability low base state and executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port is the first specific display. If the first specific display result (probability variable big hit symbol) of the result (probability big hit symbol) and the second specific display result (normal big hit symbol) is achieved, that is, if the winning is a probable variable big hit symbol, control is made to the big hit gaming state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the high probability / high base state is entered.

  On the other hand, the display result of the variable display of the special symbol that is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting opening is the first specific display result (probability big hit symbol) and the second specific display result (normal big hit symbol). Of these, when the second specific display result (normal jackpot symbol) is obtained, that is, when the normal jackpot is won, the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the low probability / high base state is entered. The With the transition to the high base state, the player launches a game ball in the right game area and aims to win a prize at the second starting port.

  Whether the big hit type in the normal state is the probability big hit or the normal big hit is determined by lottery using the random number for determining the big hit type extracted at the time of winning the first starting port. For example, a lottery may be performed so that a winning jackpot is won with a probability of 55% and a normal jackpot is won with a probability of 45%.

  In the high base state, when the game ball passes through the passing area (gate) provided in the right game area, the normal symbol variation display is executed, and the normal symbol variation display result becomes the predetermined display result. Sometimes, the second starting port formed by the electric accessory is controlled to be opened, and a prize can be awarded to the second starting port. In the high base state, since the rate at which the display result of the normal symbol variation display becomes the predetermined display result is set higher than in the low base state, the frequency of opening the electric accessory is increased, and as a result, the second start opening The frequency of winning a prize is increased.

  In the high base state, the variable symbol display period of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the passing area is set to be shorter than the variable symbol display period of the normal symbol in the low base state. Further, the special symbol variable display period executed in the high base state is set to be shorter than the special symbol variable display period in the low base state. That is, in the high base state, there is a short time state in which the variable display period of the normal symbol and the special symbol is shortened compared to the low base state.

  Here, the P1-P20 pachinko machine 200A-1 is a so-called ST (special time) type pachinko machine. An ST-type pachinko machine is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-probability state (probability change state) with a limited number of times. 100 times), it is controlled to a high probability state in which the display result of the variable symbol special display results in a specific display result is higher than that in the low probability state. Is controlled to an increased high base state (that is, the ST period is entered). On the other hand, until the special symbol variable display count after the end of the big win game state reaches the second specified number of times (for example, 50 times), the low probability / high base state is controlled (that is, it enters in a short time). .

  In the ST period, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the variable display count of the special symbol after the end of the big hit gaming state of the probability change big hit reaches the first specified number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, in the short time period, the low probability / high base state is controlled until the variable symbol display number of the special symbol after the end of the big jackpot gaming state reaches the second specified number of times (for example, 50 times).

  In the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 200A-1, the big hits in the high probability / high base state (ST state) and the low probability / high base state (short-time state) are either big hits of probability variation big hits and normal big hits. To control. That is, the big hits in the ST period and the short time period include a normal big hit and a probable big hit. If the winning jackpot is won in the ST period, the process shifts again to the ST period (the ST state continues), and if the normal jackpot is won in the ST period, the process shifts from the ST period to a short time period. In addition, when winning a promising big hit in the short-term period, the shift is made from the short-term period to the ST period, and when winning a normal big hit in the short-term period, the shift is made again in the short-time period (the short-time state continues).

  In the ST period, the ST counter value is decreased by one from the upper limit value (100 times) of the first specified number of times according to the number of executions of variable symbol special display. Then, if a big win is won before the ST counter value reaches 0, the game is controlled to the big win gaming state. Specifically, when winning the winning jackpot game, the game is shifted to the high probability / high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the big hit is won, the low probability / high base state is entered after the big hit gaming state ends.

  In the present embodiment, winning a jackpot in the ST period (high probability / high base state) is defined as “ST pullback”, and winning a jackpot in the short time period (low probability / high base state) is defined as “short pullback”. Is defined. In the present embodiment, the number and ratio of occurrence of this ST pull-back and time pull-back are totaled as the specific game history information. The ST pullback and the short time pullback are events that are beneficial to the player because the winning ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the occurrence of the ST pullback and the short time pullback.

  In addition, the number, percentage, etc. of winning the “probable big hit” in the ST period (or short time period), and the number, percentage, etc., winning the “non-probable big hit” in the ST period (or short time period) are tabulated as a specific game history. You may make it do.

  Further, the above pullback definition can be applied to both the ST-type pachinko machine 200A and the non-ST-type pachinko machine 200A. As a result, regardless of the model and type of the pachinko machine 200A, it is possible to aggregate information relating to pullback in each state as specific game history information.

[1-3-2. P21-P40 pachinko machines]
The pachinko machine 200A-2 of P21 to P40 shown in FIG. 4 is different from the pachinko machine 200A-1 of P1 to P20 shown in FIG. 3 below the effect display device 9 arranged in the center of the game area. A distribution device 90 is provided that receives game balls and distributes the received game balls alternately to the first start winning port 13a and the second starting winning port 13b by the swing member 93. The inflow port 92 is provided immediately below the effect display device 9, but when a left-handed game ball is shot to aim at the left game area 7A, the game ball easily flows in, and the right game area 7B is aimed at. When the player hits the game ball to the right, it is difficult for the game ball to flow in due to the arrangement of the game nails and the guide members 39a to 39c provided on the flow path of the game ball.

  The winning device having the first start winning port 13a is provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the left game area 7A side by the allocating device 90 can win, and the winning device having the second starting winning port 13b is The game balls distributed to the right game area 7B side by the minute device 90 are provided at positions where winning can be achieved. As described above, both the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b are arranged at positions where game balls via the sorting device 90 can be won. A variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upper right side of the second start winning opening 13b. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the tilt control of the movable blade piece. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball launched into the right gaming area 7B can win the second start winning opening 13b.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 200A-2, since the variable winning ball device 15 is provided corresponding to the second starting winning port 13b, the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15 is the second starting prize. This is equivalent to winning a game ball in the mouth 13b. That is, the second start condition for variably displaying the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15 is established.

  In the present embodiment, a gate 32 is provided in the right game area 7B as a passing area through which game balls can pass. When the player is left-handed, the game ball does not pass through the gate 32, so the variable winning ball device 15 will not be in the open state, but the game ball that has passed through the sorting device 90 is It can be expected to win the 2 start winning opening 13b. On the other hand, when the player is making a right-hand hit, the game ball passes through the gate 32, so that the normal symbol variable display is started. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, the variable winning ball device 15 is It can be expected that the game ball launched into the right game area 7B will enter the second start winning opening 13b in the open state. That is, it can be expected that the game ball will win the second start winning opening 13b both in the case of left-handed and right-handed.

  The allocating device 90 includes members 92a to 92c projecting from the game board 6 to the game area side, and a swing member 93 provided in the allocating area surrounded by the members 92a to 92c. The members 92a and 92b form an inflow port 92, the members 92a and 92c form a game ball path from the swing member 93 to the first start winning opening 13a, and the members 92b and 92c perform a second start from the swing member 93. A game ball path to the winning opening 13b is formed. When the variable winning ball device 15 is not in the open state, the gaming ball cannot pass between the lower end of the member 92b and the second start winning port 13b, and the gaming ball that does not pass through the sorting device 90 is the first. It is impossible to win the 2 start winning opening 13b. On the other hand, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can pass between the lower end of the member 92b and the second starting winning port 13b, and the right game without passing through the distribution device 90. The game ball fired in the area 7B can win the second start winning opening 13b.

  The swing member 93 that can swing left and right is configured to be rotatable about a shaft portion 93a. A left protrusion 93c and a right protrusion 93b that restrict the rotational movement of the swing member 93 are disposed at the lower left and the lower right of the swing member 93, respectively. The swing member 93 includes a first ball receiving portion 93e that guides the game ball flowing in from the inflow port 92 toward the first start winning opening 13a located on the lower left side, and the game ball flowing in from the inflow port 92 in the lower right direction. And a second ball receiving portion 93d that leads toward the second start winning opening 13b. The center of gravity of the game ball that has entered each ball receiving portion is configured to be shifted from the shaft portion 93a in the left-right direction. The swinging member 40 is rotated by the weight of the game ball that has entered, and the game balls are distributed alternately left and right.

  Due to the inclination of the swing member 93, the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port 92 flows into one of the ball receiving portions. The center of gravity of the game ball that has entered the first ball receiving portion 93e is shifted to the left from the shaft portion 93a and rotates counterclockwise with respect to the shaft portion 93a. When the swinging member 93 moves by a predetermined angle, the swinging member 93 hits the left protrusion 93c and its rotational movement is restricted. The game ball that has entered the first ball receiving portion 93e falls from the first ball receiving portion 93e and flows down toward the first start winning opening 13a. In this state, the second ball receiving portion 93d is arranged at a position where a game ball can be entered. Next, the game ball entered from the inflow port 92 enters the second ball receiving portion 93d. The center of gravity of the game ball that has entered the second ball receiving portion 93d is shifted to the right side from the shaft portion 93a and rotates clockwise relative to the shaft portion 93a. When the rocking member 93 moves by a predetermined angle, the swinging member 93 hits the right protrusion 93b and its rotational movement is restricted. The game ball that has entered the second ball receiving portion 93d falls from the second ball receiving portion 93d and flows down toward the second start winning prize opening 13b. In this state, the first ball receiving portion 93e is arranged at a position where a game ball can be entered. Next, the game ball entered from the inflow port 92 enters the first ball receiving portion 93e. By repeatedly executing such an operation, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 92 are alternately distributed to the first start winning port 13a and the second starting winning port 13b in accordance with the flow order.

  The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13a is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 14a. The game ball won in the second start winning opening 13b is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 15a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, a game ball that has been launched into the right game area 7B and does not pass through the sorting device 90 can be awarded to the second start winning port 13b, which is advantageous for the player. Become. When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball directed to the variable winning ball device 15 that is launched into the right game area 7B is very likely to win the second start winning port 13b. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state, a game ball that does not pass through the distribution device 90 does not win the second start winning port 13b. Therefore, when left-handed is executed, game balls flow into the inflow port 92, and game balls win alternately at the first start winning port 13a and the second starting winning port 13b in the order of inflow. On the other hand, when the right strike is executed, the game ball that does not pass through the sorting device 90 wins the second start winning opening 13b, so that the winning to the second start winning opening 13b continues. .

  In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 200A-2 of P21 to P40 can be a conventional probability change machine (non-ST machine) that is not the ST type of the probability change machines. When winning the winning jackpot in the normal state, the game goes through the jackpot gaming state of low probability / low base state, and shifts to the probability changing period of high probability / high base state.

  In the high probability / high base state, rounds are sorted in the big win lottery. Round distribution includes, for example, a 16-round probability variation jackpot, a 5-round probability variation jackpot, a latent probability variation jackpot, and a 5-round normal jackpot. In the high probability state, when winning 16 rounds probable big hit or 5 rounds probable big hit, the game goes through the low probability / low base state big hit gaming state and again shifts to the high probability / high base state.

  In addition, when winning five rounds of regular big hits in the probabilistic state, it is controlled to a specified number of times (for example, 20 times) short-time state (low probability / high base state) through a low probability / low base state big hit gaming state. The Then, when a big hit is won in the short-time state, the game proceeds to a high probability / high base state through a low probability / low base state big hit gaming state. If the big win is not won in the short time state, the normal state returns to the low probability / low base state.

  In addition, the latent probability variation big hit is a big hit whose opening pattern of the big winning opening is common with the small hit and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished. “Small win” refers to a control mode in which the game state does not change after the completion of the opening control of the big winning opening, although the big winning opening is opened in a specific opening pattern (for example, 0.5 seconds is opened twice). When winning the latent probability variation big hit, the game proceeds to the high probability / low base state latent probability varying state through the low probability / low base state big hit gaming state.

  In any of the pachinko machines 200A shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the number of hitting balls won in each winning opening and the number of hitting balls collected in the out opening 26 are the number of out balls provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 200A. Counting is performed by a device (not shown), and a driving signal (1 pulse per 10 balls) is output to the outside according to the counted driving ball number, so that the number of driving balls is notified to the outside. In addition, when the specific game state (big hit game state) occurs, the big hit signal is set to the output state, so that the occurrence of the big hit is notified to the outside. Further, when the special symbol is stopped, a start signal having a predetermined pulse width is output to notify the outside that the special symbol variable display (variable display) has been performed in the special symbol variable display unit 28. Even when a hitting ball is won at the big winning opening (that is, the grant condition is satisfied), the winning ball corresponding to the winning is paid out by a ball cutting and discharging device (not shown) and also paid out by the ball cutting and discharging device. A prize ball signal (1 pulse per 10 balls) is output to the outside according to the number of prize balls (number of balls given), so that the number of prize balls is notified to the outside. Further, when the probability variation big hit is reached, the probability variation state signal is set to the output state during the probability variation state after the probability variation big hit ends, so that the occurrence of the probability variation state is notified to the outside. Also, during the time-short state, the time-short-time signal is set to the output state, so that the occurrence of the time-short state is notified to the outside.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 200A according to the present embodiment is capable of playing games peculiar to each model (summarizing model-specific data, etc.), but a signal output from the pachinko machine 200A. Are common. As described above, the model-specific data is aggregated by the hall computer 600. The hall computer 600 performs a different process for each model, so that the model-specific data is aggregated even if a common signal is output. Can do.

  The pachinko machine 200A of this embodiment is equipped with an information output board (not shown) for outputting these signals to the outside, and the information output board, the data display device 400, and the hall computer 600 are not shown. A signal signal is connected via a signal cable, and a game signal consisting of a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a time reduction signal, a start signal, and a prize ball signal is transmitted from the information output board via the signal cable and the data display device 400. It is output to the hall computer 600.

  The jackpot signal is a signal indicating that a big hit has occurred and also a signal indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. During the period in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot signal is turned on, and during the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, the jackpot signal is turned off. Thereby, it is possible to specify that a big hit has occurred in the gaming apparatus connected to the pachinko machine 200A, such as the data display device 400 or the hall computer 600, and that the big hit gaming state is controlled.

  The probability changing signal is a signal indicating that the ratio of occurrence of big hits is controlled to a high probability state (probability changing state) in which the ratio is higher than the low probability state (normal state). During the period in which the high probability state is controlled, the probability changing signal is turned on, and during the period not controlled in the high probability state, the probability changing signal is turned off. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the high probability state, the operation of reducing the variable display time of the variable display device is performed in the same manner as in the time reduction state. Both signals are turned on. Therefore, the gaming machine such as the data display device 400 and the management device such as the hall computer 600 are controlled so that the pachinko machine 200A is in the certainty variation state because the probability variation signal and the time reduction signal are turned on. Can be identified.

  The short time signal is a signal indicating that the short time state is controlled to shorten the variable display time of the variable display device. During the period controlled to the time reduction state, the time reduction signal is turned on, and during the period not controlled to the time reduction state, the time reduction signal is turned off. In the present embodiment, the time-short state is set to a low-probability state in which the ratio of occurrence of big hits is the same as that in the normal state, and when the time-short state is controlled, only the time-short medium signal is turned on. Therefore, although the probability changing signal is in the OFF state, the gaming device and the management device can specify that the pachinko machine 200A is controlled in the time-short state by setting the time-shortening signal to the ON state.

  In addition, when it is controlled to the probability changing state but not to the short time state, it is controlled to the latent probability changing state. In this latent probability changing state, the probability changing signal is turned on, but the time reduction signal is turned off. It is difficult for the player to specify whether a small hit or a latent probability change big hit has occurred if the big prize opening is opened with a specific opening pattern. However, although the time reduction signal is in the OFF state, the gaming device or the management device can specify that the pachinko machine 200A is controlled to the latent probability changing state because the probability changing signal is in the ON state.

  The pachinko machine 200 according to the present embodiment has a control for counting and paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from a game control board that controls the game in the pachinko machine 200 based on a prize ball signal output based on a prize. In addition, a predetermined payout unit of 25 balls is calculated from the number of local counting balls of the player counted by the units such as the inter-unit counting unit 500 and the card unit 300, and the number of stored balls / held balls owned by the player. A payout control board (not shown) for controlling payout of multiple balls (for example, 125 balls) is provided, and game balls with the number of balls in the payout unit are based on payout signals output from the unit. It is configured to be able to pay out. Further, the payout control board is configured to be able to rent game balls corresponding to the prepaid balance owned by the player based on the lending-related signal output from the unit.

  In the present embodiment, the payout and lending of game balls will be described as being realized by CR communication in which a payout signal and a lending-related signal are transmitted from the unit to the pachinko machine 200. Unlike the present embodiment, the unit is configured to pay out and rent out the game balls via a nozzle provided so as to extend from a predetermined position of the unit to an upper position of the upper plate of the pachinko machine 200. May be.

  The pachinko machine 200 according to the present embodiment may be an encapsulated ball pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as an “enclosed pachinko machine”) 200B, which will be described later, instead of a normal pachinko machine. In the enclosing method pachinko machine 200B, pachinko balls are encapsulated, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle, the firing motor of the launching device is driven to drive the enclosing balls into the game area one by one. It is configured as follows. Pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area will win at any of the winning openings or be collected at the out opening without winning. The pachinko balls that have won at any one of the winning holes and the pachinko balls that have been collected at the out mouth are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the gaming machine. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is hit again into the game area.

  Although details will be described later, in the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, the player plays a game with points. Specifically, every time a shot ball is detected by the shot ball detector provided in the launch device, the score is subtracted, and every time a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detector, the score is added. So, update your score from time to time. In addition, when a game ball wins a winning opening, the score is updated as needed by adding a score corresponding to the winning to the winning opening.

[1-4. Configuration of inter-unit counting unit 500]
FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an external configuration of the inter-counter counting unit 500, and FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the inter-counter counting unit 500.

  On the front surface of the inter-counter counting unit 500, an operation button 550 including a ticket issuing button 551 and a payout button 552, and a card insertion slot 560 for a player to insert / remove a possession card are provided.

  When the player presses the ticketing button 551, a possession card in which the number of possessed balls (number of possessions) of the player at that time is recorded is issued from the card insertion slot 560. Also, when the player presses the payout button 552, a predetermined number of unit balls (multiple of the above 25 balls: for example, 125 balls) out of the number of possessed balls are paid back to the pachinko machine 200A. By using this, the player can play a game.

  The card insertion slot 560 is connected to a holding card reader / writer (R / W) 570 built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 560, and is inserted from the card insertion slot 560 by the holding card R / W 570. The recorded information of the card ID and the number of possessed balls (number of possessed balls) recorded on the retained ball card is read and written.

  In addition, a control unit 505 for controlling the operation of the inter-counter counting unit 500 is provided at a substantially central position of the inter-counter counting unit 500 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the inter-counter counting unit 500. The various operations of the inter-counter counting unit 500 are controlled by the control unit 505.

  Further, the pachinko balls are counted and taken into the lowermost position of the inter-unit counting unit 500, and the counted pachinko balls are the maximum fraction, that is, the pachinko with a fraction less than the unit of the payout unit balls in the corresponding pachinko machine 200A. A counting payout unit 380 for paying out balls is provided. Hereinafter, “fraction less than unit” is referred to as “fraction”.

  The counting and payout unit 380 is connected to a horizontally long box-shaped connection box 340 disposed between the lower plate 24 of the pachinko machine 200A and the repair plate of the game island.

  The connection box 340 is formed on the terminal side of the connection box 340 and has a relatively large height box (not shown) in the height direction, and a relatively small thickness in the height direction. It is comprised from the path | route box (not shown) formed so that a connection part may be connected.

  The connection box 340 is connected to the counting / dispensing unit 380 so that the terminal box is positioned below the lower plate 24. Pachinko balls discharged from the lower plate 24 are placed on the upper surface of the terminal box. A feeding portion 345 having a hopper shape is formed. Also, at the lower front position of the terminal box, there is an open / close shutter that can be opened and closed by the player and is normally energized so as to be closed, and the fraction paid back (returned) from the counting payout unit 380 A return port 342 through which the pachinko balls are discharged is provided.

  In addition, the upper position in the path box is provided so as to incline toward the counting / dispensing unit 380, and the two flow paths that guide the pachinko balls introduced into the inserting portion 345 to the counting / dispensing unit 380 under natural flow. A counting passage 343 composed of a passage is provided. A return passage 344 is provided below the counting passage 343 so as to incline toward the return opening 342 and guides the pachinko balls paid out from the counting discharge unit 380 to the return opening 342 in a natural flow. Yes.

  A counting lever 341 is provided at the upper front position of the terminal box 340a. The counting lever 341 is slidable by the player. By sliding the counting lever 341 against the biasing force, the insertion portion 345 is provided. The opening / closing shutter 346 provided at the entrance to the counting passage 343 is opened.

  The count dispensing unit 380 to which the connection box 340 is connected is connected to the counting passage 343 and is inclined from the front side of the inter-unit counting unit 500 toward the inner side of the inter-unit counting unit 500. A counting sensor (not shown) that detects and counts pachinko balls flowing down the inflow path is provided for each flow path at the end position of the inflow path. Pachinko balls that have flowed into the counting and dispensing unit 380 through the passage 343 are detected and counted by the counting sensor. When counted by the counting sensor, a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the count dispensing unit 380 to the control unit 505 in response to the detection of one pachinko ball. Each time the detection signal is input, the control unit 505 adds 1 to the stored number of possessed balls.

  When the number of balls possessed by the player increases, the pachinko balls discharged from the pachinko machine 200A are allowed to flow from the lower plate 24 into the counting passage 343 at any time by keeping the player pulling the counting lever 341. In the case where the number is increased at any time by being counted by the counting and paying unit 380, the pachinko ball discharged from the pachinko machine 200A is kept in the lower plate without pulling the counting lever 341. There are two cases where the pachinko balls that have been accumulated flow into the counting passage 343 at a stroke by pulling the counting lever 341 when the balls have accumulated, and increase at a stroke by being counted by the counting dispensing unit 380.

  In addition, when the number of possessed balls of the player decreases, the pachinko ball is refunded to the player by the player's refund operation, and the number of possessed balls stored each time a refund operation is performed. Is subtracted by the number of unit balls described above. However, if a refund operation is performed when the number of possessed balls is less than the number of unit balls, the number of possessed balls is set to zero.

  In addition, the inter-unit counting unit 500 and the pachinko machine 200A are used for lending-related signals associated with lending pachinko balls having a predetermined number of balls as lending units, and paying out pachinko balls having a predetermined number of balls as lending units. It is configured to be able to send and receive accompanying payout related signals. The lending-related signals include lending request signals for causing the pachinko machine 200A to lend gaming balls from the inter-counter counting unit 500, stand terminal lending completion signals and stand READY signals output from the pachinko machine 200A, inter-counter counting. Signals such as a unit READY signal and a terminal terminal lending request completion confirmation signal are included. Also, from the pachinko machine 200A, it is output from game signals such as a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a short and middle signal, a prize ball signal, a start signal, and an out ball counter provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 200A. The driving signal can be received.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the inter-counter counting unit 500 includes a control unit 505, an operation button 550, a ball card insertion / ejection unit 565, a ball card R / W 570, a count payout unit 380, A communication unit 570 and a second communication unit 580 are provided.

  The control unit 505 includes a processing unit 510, which is a kind of control device such as a CPU, a ROM 520, which is a kind of nonvolatile storage device, and card information 531 such as the number of possession balls recorded on the accepted possession card. The RAM 530 is a kind of volatile storage device that can be stored, and an RTC 540 that can output time information, calendar information, and the like. The RAM 530 is backed up by a battery (not shown) and retains data stored for a predetermined period even when the power is shut off.

  The ROM 520 stores an inter-counter counting unit processing program 521 that is read by the processing unit 510 and executed as inter-unit counting unit processing (see FIG. 23). The inter-counter counting unit process will be described later in detail using a flowchart.

  In the card information 531 stored in the RAM 530, information such as the possessed card ID and the number of possessed balls (number of possessed balls) of the player is recorded. The RAM 530 stores possession ball number data 531 indicating the number of pachinko balls possessed by the player (the number of possession balls).

  The first communication unit 570 is a communication device for transferring data and transmitting / receiving signals to / from the data display device 400, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. . The first communication unit 570 transmits the number of possessed balls of the player to the data display device 400 according to the control of the processing unit 510. In addition, the first communication unit 570 transmits a card insertion / discharge signal to the data display device 400 under the control of the processing unit 510 when the player performs an operation of inserting or ejecting a ball card.

  The second communication unit 580 is a communication device for sending and receiving data and sending and receiving signals to and from the possession management computer 800, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. The The second communication unit 580 transmits the number of balls possessed by the player to the ball management computer 800 under the control of the processing unit 510.

  In the above description, for convenience, the first communication unit 570 and the second communication unit 580 are separately illustrated and described as two communication units, but the first communication unit 570, the second communication unit 580, and the like. May be configured as one communication unit. The same applies to communication units in other various apparatuses.

[1-5. Functional configuration of hall computer]
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the hall computer 600.
The hall computer 600 includes a processing unit 610, an input unit 620, a display unit 625, a sound output unit 630, a clock unit 635, a first communication unit 640, a second communication unit 650, a ROM 670, and a hard disk 680. And a RAM 690, each of which is a computer system connected via a bus.

  The processing unit 610 is configured to include a processor such as a CPU and a DSP that controls each part of the hall computer 600 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the ROM 670, and an electrical and electronic element such as an ASIC. Device and arithmetic unit. In the present embodiment, the processing unit 610 includes a display setting unit 611 and a tabulation setting unit 612 as main functional units.

  The input unit 620 is an input unit configured to include, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the processing unit 610. By an operation input from the input unit 620, an instruction operation such as editing of data in various databases stored in the hard disk 680 is performed.

  The display unit 625 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the processing unit 610, and includes an LCD or the like. The display unit 625 displays data contents of various databases stored in the hard disk 680.

  The sound output unit 630 is a sound output device such as a speaker that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 610. From the sound output unit 630, for example, a warning sound or the like for notifying an administrator of a warning or the like when a warning is issued or an abnormality occurs is output.

  The clock unit 635 is an internal clock included in the hall computer 600, and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The clocking time (including date) of the clock unit 635 is output to the processing unit 610.

  The first communication unit 640 is a communication device for performing communication with the pachinko machine 200A, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The first communication unit 640 receives game signals such as a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a time-shortage signal, a driving signal, a prize ball signal, a start signal, and the like from the pachinko machine 200A. In addition to these game signals, a safe signal indicating the number of safe balls or an out ball signal indicating the number of out balls may be received.

  The second communication unit 650 is a communication device for performing communication with the data display device 400, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. Under the control of the processing unit 610, the second communication unit 650 causes the data display device 400 to perform model setting and display setting, such as tabulation setting data 691 and display setting data 693, or the data display device 400 simultaneously. A display instruction signal including a simultaneous effect display instruction signal for instructing display of the effect is transmitted to the data display device 400.

  The ROM 670 is a read-only nonvolatile storage device, and stores various programs such as a system program of the hall computer 600. In the present embodiment, the ROM 670 stores a management program 671 that is read by the processing unit 610 and executed as management processing. The management program 671 includes a display setting program 671a executed as a display setting process and a total setting program 671b executed as a total setting process as subroutines.

  The hall computer 6001A may be configured not to include the ROM 670 as a storage device. In this case, the various programs described above may be stored in, for example, the hard disk 680.

  The hard disk 680 is a readable / writable nonvolatile storage device, and stores various data related to display settings of the data display device 400 and various databases related to games in the pachinko machine 200A. Specifically, a display content setting table 681, a simultaneous effect display setting table 682, a display mode setting table 683, a game history information totaling table 684, a data display device management table 685, and a general game A history database 686, an individual game history database 687, and a sales management database 689 are stored.

  The display content setting table 681 is a table related to the setting of the display content of the data display device 400, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. The display content setting table 681 stores a pachinko machine ID, a model name, a display type, and a display content in association with each other.

The pachinko machine ID is a number (ID) for uniquely identifying each pachinko machine 200A, and is individually assigned to each pachinko machine 200A.
The model name is the model name of the pachinko machine 200A with the pachinko machine ID.
The display type is a display type of the data display device 400, and in this embodiment, two types of “normal” and “simultaneous effect” are defined.
The display content is display content to be displayed on the display unit of the data display device 400, and the display content of the first display unit 430 and the display content of the second display unit 440 are individually determined.

  Specifically, the model name of the pachinko machine 200A having the pachinko machine IDs P1 to P20 is “pachinko XXX”. The display screen displayed on the first display unit 430 at “normal time” includes (1) general game history data screen, (2) individual game history data screen, (3) jackpot history graph screen, (4) output Six types of display screens are defined: a ball graph screen, (5) special image screen, and (6) menu screen.

  (1) The total game history data screen is a display screen for displaying the total game history information in the pachinko machine 200A of the model of the corresponding pachinko machine ID. As the display content, (1-1) common total game history information And (1-2) peculiar total game history information is defined.

  The common general game history information is the common game history information among the general game history information regardless of the type of gaming machine, and includes information such as the probability variation big hit count, the normal big hit count, and the start count as described later. It is. The specific general game history information is specific game history information depending on the type of the game machine among the general game history information, and information such as the number of ST rushes, the number of short-time rushes, and the ST rush rate, as will be described later. included. The common game history data and the specific game history information are displayed on the game history data screen.

  (2) The personal game history data screen is a display screen for displaying personal game history information in the pachinko machine 200A of the model of the pachinko machine ID, and includes (2-1) common personal game history information as display contents. And (2-2) unique personal game history information is defined.

  The common personal game history information is the common game history information among the personal game history information regardless of the type of gaming machine. Such information is included in this. The unique individual game history information is unique game history information that depends on the type of gaming machine among the individual game history information. As will be described later, the ST remaining 10-turn pullback count, the short pullback count, the ST pullback rate, etc. This includes information. On the personal game history data screen, the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information are displayed.

  (3) The jackpot history graph screen is a display screen for displaying a jackpot history generated in the pachinko machine 200A of the model of the pachinko machine ID.

  (4) The output ball graph screen is a display screen for displaying a graph of the output ball (or difference ball) in the pachinko machine 200A of the model of the pachinko machine ID.

  (5) The special image screen is a special display screen that displays the number of balls possessed by a player who plays with the pachinko machine 200A provided corresponding to the data display device 400 using a predetermined image. In other words, it can be paraphrased as a possessed ball count image display screen that represents the number of possessed balls of the player using a predetermined image, or a possessed ball count simple display screen that simply represents the number of possessed balls of the player.

  (6) The menu screen is a display screen on which a player who plays with the pachinko machine 200A of the corresponding model with the pachinko machine ID performs menu selection.

  In addition, for the pachinko machine 200A having the pachinko machine IDs P1 to P20, the display contents of the first display unit 430 “during simultaneous production” include (1) jackpot running production, (2) pachinko machine special video, (3) special Character video is defined.

(1) The big hit running effect is the first of the data display device 400 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 200A of the same model when the big hit pachinko machine 200A exists among the same type of pachinko machines 200A. This is an effect of displaying a special video celebrating the big hit on the display unit 430. Whether there is a big hit pachinko machine 200A among the same type of pachinko machines 200A can be determined by whether a big hit signal is input from the same type of pachinko machine 200A.

  If a big hit occurs in a plurality of pachinko machines 200A of the same model and a big hit signal is input from a plurality of pachinko machines 200A with a time lag, if a big hit running effect is being executed for one pachinko machine 200A, it is executed. The big hit running effect may be newly executed during the middle big hit running effect, or after the running big hit running effect is ended, the big hit running effect may be newly executed. Further, when a big hit occurs in another pachinko machine 200A during the big hit running effect, the execution of a new big hit running effect may be omitted.

  The above running effect is realized by causing the data display device 400 to display a big hit video with a certain time difference from end to end of the game island. In this case, sound or music related to the big hit video is output from the sound output unit 450 as a specific sound.

  Unlike the big hit running effect, in the individual data display device 400, when a big hit occurs in the pachinko machine 200A provided corresponding to the data display device 400, a fanfare sound congratulating the big hit is displayed in the data display. The sound output unit 450 of the device 400 may output the specific sound.

  In addition, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases with 1000 hits, 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots,... You may make it display the breakthrough display of the possession number of balls on the 1st display part 430, or output the breakthrough notification sound of the possession number of balls from the sound output part 450 as a specific sound. In addition, the number of possession balls which carry out breakthrough notification is good also as 1000 shot units, 5000 shot units, and 10,000 shot units.

  (2) The special video of the pachinko machine is a promotion video of the pachinko machine 200A of the model, and is displayed simultaneously on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 200A of the same model. Let This is realized by transmitting a simultaneous effect display instruction signal for effecting and displaying the pachinko machine special video all at once to the data display devices 400 for all the pachinko machines 200A of the same model.

  (3) The special character image is an image of a hidden character or a mascot character of the pachinko machine 200A of the model, and the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 200A of the same model. To display the effect simultaneously. This is realized by transmitting a simultaneous effect display instruction signal for effecting and displaying special character images all at once to the data display devices 400 corresponding to all pachinko machines 200A of the same model.

  Further, the display contents of the second display unit 440 in the normal state are defined as (1) vacant car information, (2) jackpot information, (3) ST information, and (4) time reduction information.

(1) The vacant machine information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is currently vacant.
Whether or not the pachinko machine 200A is an empty board can be determined by an operation determination process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 described later.

  In the operation determination process, for example, when no game signal is received from the pachinko machine 200A for a certain time (for example, when no driving signal or prize ball signal is received), the pachinko machine 200A is not in an operating state (non-operating). State), and it can be determined that it is an empty base.

  In the present embodiment, since the card unit 300 is also provided in the pachinko machine 200A, the card insertion / discharge signal from the card unit 300, the number of local counting balls, the number of stored balls, the number of held balls, the prepaid balance, etc. It is also possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 200A is an empty board by performing an operation determination process based on the data. Further, a signal from the pachinko machine 200A and a signal from the card unit 300 are used in combination, and an operation determination process is performed based on these signals to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 200A is an empty board. May be. In this case, it is possible to more reliably perform the operation determination and the empty table determination.

  Further, even if the game signal is not received from the pachinko machine 200A for a certain period of time or more, the player may have left the seat for reasons such as a toilet break after securing the seat. Therefore, for a pachinko machine 200A in which no player is seated, the store clerk may look around and check whether the stand is in operation (whether it is an empty stand). If it is determined that the vacant table is available, the store clerk may set the data display device 400 to display the vacant table using the setting remote controller at hand.

  (2) The jackpot information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is in a jackpot. While the jackpot signal is received from the pachinko machine 200A, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 200A is in a big hit. This jackpot information is different from the common game history information displayed on the first display unit 430, but indicates that the pachinko machine 200A is in a jackpot, and is information that does not depend on the type of game machine. It can be said that it is a kind of common game history information.

  (3) The ST information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is currently in the ST state. As described above, the ST state is a state in which the symbol can be changed in the high probability state by the first specified number of times. While the probability changing signal and the time reduction signal are received from the pachinko machine 200A, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 200A is in the ST state. This ST information is different from the specific game history information displayed on the first display unit 430, but indicates that the pachinko machine 200A is in the ST state and is specific information corresponding to the type of the game machine. Therefore, it can be said that it is a kind of specific game history information.

  (4) Time reduction information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is currently in a time reduction state. As described above, the short time state is a state in which the symbol can be changed in the low probability state by the second specified number of times. While the time reduction signal is received from the pachinko machine 200A, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 200A is in the time reduction state. The short / long time information is different from the specific game history information displayed on the first display unit 430, but indicates that the pachinko machine 200A is in the short time state, and is specific information according to the type of the game machine. Therefore, it can be said that it is a kind of specific game history information.

  In addition, (1) store advertisement information, (2) new stand replacement information, and (3) store event information are defined as display contents of the second display unit 440 at the time of “simultaneous production”.

  (1) The store advertisement information is information indicating the business hours of the store, the model name of the installed pachinko machine 200A, service contents, and the like.

  (2) New machine replacement information is information indicating the pachinko machine 200A introduced as a new machine and information for notifying the date and time of the next new machine replacement.

  (3) Store event information is information relating to an event performed at the store. For example, information such as Ladies' Day or Silver Day is included.

  Similarly, for the pachinko machine 200A having pachinko machine IDs P21 to P40, the model name is “pachinko YYY”, and the display contents of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 are respectively defined.

  The pachinko machines 200 with the pachinko machine IDs P21 to P40 are “pachinko YYY”, and the display screen similar to “pachinko XXX” is defined as the display content of the first display unit 430 of “normal”. However, the P1 to P20 pachinko machines 200A-1 and P21 to P40 pachinko machines 200A-2 are different in model, so that the total game history displayed on the general game history data screen and the individual game history data screen respectively. The contents of the information and personal game history information are different.

  Further, for the pachinko machines 200 with the pachinko machine IDs P21 to P40, the display contents of the first display unit 430 “at the time of simultaneous production” include (1) jackpot running production, (2) pachinko machine special video, (3) In addition to the special character video, (4) live video is defined. In addition, regarding the pachinko machine 200A having pachinko machine IDs P21 to P40, the display contents of the second display unit 440 in the normal state include (1) vacant car information, (2) jackpot information, (3) latent probability change information, ( 4) Time information is defined.

  (3) The latent probability change information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is currently in a latent probability change state. As described above, the latent probability changing state is a state in which the opening pattern of the big prize opening is a big hit common to the small hit, and is controlled to the probability changing state after the big hit gaming state is finished. While the probability changing signal is received from the pachinko machine 200A, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 200A is in the latent probability changing state while the time reduction signal is not received. In the latent probability changing state, the player does not know at first glance, but since the probability changing state is latent and the lottery is performed with the probability of probability variation, the player is likely to win a big hit by continuing the game as it is.

  (4) Time reduction information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is currently in a time reduction state. Since the lottery is performed with the normal probability in the short time state, the possibility of winning a big hit is not different from the normal state.

  That is, in this embodiment, the display contents to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 200A according to the model of the pachinko machine 200A are displayed on the hall computer 600. It can be set freely on the side.

  In the display content setting table 681, game information based on information output from the pachinko machine 200 </ b> A is defined as display content of the second display unit 440. Specifically, the various types of information determined as the display contents of the second display unit 440 during normal time are information that can be specified based on the game signal output from the pachinko machine 200A. Therefore, the display content setting unit of the hall computer 600 can set game information based on information output from the pachinko machine 200A as the display content of the second display unit 440.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the game information visible to a player other than the player. For example, even if the pachinko machine 200A is in the latent probability changing state, it is possible to notify the player other than the player that the latent probability changing state is not known to the player without knowing that it is in the latent probability changing state. It becomes.

  Further, in the display content setting table 681, less information than information displayed on the first display unit 430 is determined as information displayed on the second display unit 440. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7, the type of display screen displayed on the second display unit 440 is smaller than the type of display screen displayed on the first display unit 430. In addition, as described above, information related to a plurality of types of game histories is displayed on the game history data screen. The types of information displayed on the first display unit 430 are based on information displayed on the second display unit 440. There are many types.

  Thereby, the display content setting unit of the hall computer 600 sets the display content so that less information than the information displayed on the first display unit 430 is displayed on the second display unit 440. According to this, information other than the player can be visually recognized with an appropriate amount of information. Since the information displayed on the second display unit 440 is for players other than the player, the information may be less than the information displayed on the first display unit 430 that the player confirms during the game. When a player looks around the entire amusement island, it is considered that there are many cases where it does not usually look so fine.

  In the display content setting table 681, display contents to be displayed on the display unit (first display unit 430, second, second display unit 440) of the data display device 400 are defined. By creating display setting data 691 using this display content setting table 681, the display content of the display unit of the data display device 400 is set. Therefore, the hall computer 600 has display content setting means for setting the display content of the data display device 400.

  The simultaneous effect display setting table 682 is a table related to the display setting of the data display device 400 at the time of the simultaneous effect, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. In the simultaneous production display setting table 682, display setting information related to the simultaneous production is defined for each model of the plurality of pachinko machines 200A. Specifically, in the simultaneous effect display setting table 682, a model name, a simultaneous effect type, a simultaneous effect display condition, and simultaneous effect video data 493 are defined in association with each other.

The simultaneous effect type is various display contents defined in the display type “simultaneous effect” in the display content setting table 681.
The simultaneous effect display condition is a condition for causing the first display unit 430 to display the simultaneous effect.
The simultaneous effect video data 493 is video data to be displayed on the first display unit 430 when the simultaneous effect display condition is satisfied.

  For example, for the model name “Pachinko XXX”, “Big hit running production”, “Pachinko machine special video”, and “Special character video” are defined as simultaneous production types. The simultaneous performance display condition of the “big hit running effect” is “there is a big hit pachinko machine in the same model of the pachinko machine”. It is.

  The simultaneous effect display condition of the “pachinko machine special image” is “every time the first specified time has elapsed”, and in this case, the simultaneous effect image displayed on the first display unit 430 is “Movie_XXX2”. The first specified time can be set as appropriate, for example, 3 hours. The time when the first specified time elapses is, for example, every time the first specified time elapses after the power of the pachinko machine 200A is turned on on the business day.

  The simultaneous effect display condition of the “special character image” is “every second specified time has elapsed”, and the simultaneous effect image displayed on the first display unit 430 in this case is “Movie_XXX3”. The second specified time can be set as appropriate, for example, 2 hours. The time when the second specified time elapses is, for example, every time the second specified time elapses after the power of the pachinko machine 200A is turned on on the business day.

  The simultaneous effect video data is different video data corresponding to the corresponding simultaneous effect type. In addition, as for the model “Pachinko YYY” and other types of pachinko machines, as shown in the drawing, data related to a plurality of simultaneous performances is defined. It is characterized in that different data relating to simultaneous production is set for each model of the pachinko machine 200A.

  In the above-described simultaneous effect display setting table 682, display conditions are determined in addition to the display contents of the display unit of the data display device 400, and the processing unit 610 uses the simultaneous effect display setting table 682. By creating the display setting data 691, the display contents and display conditions of the data display device 400 are set. Therefore, the hall computer 600 has display condition setting means for setting the display conditions of the data display device 400 in addition to the display content setting means.

  The display mode setting table 683 is a table that defines display patterns of information to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400. The first display unit display mode setting table 683a, This includes the second display unit display mode setting table 683b. The first display unit display mode setting table 683a includes a specific personal game history display mode setting table 6831 used for setting the display mode of the specific personal game history.

FIG. 9 is an example of a table configuration of the first display unit display mode setting table 683a.
The first display unit display mode setting table 683a is a table defined for each model name of the pachinko machine 200A. For each model of the pachinko machine 200A, the display screen type, the display screen name, the display pattern, the first The display mode of the display unit is determined in association with each other. As will be described later, the player can freely switch the display screen to be displayed on the first display unit 430, and the variation of the display mode for the player to customize the display mode of information to be displayed on each display screen, It is defined in the first display part display mode setting table 683a.

  As can be seen from the table configuration of FIG. 9, the first display unit display mode setting table 683a is configured to change the display mode (initial display mode (default), customization) of information displayed on each display screen to the model of the pachinko machine 200A. It is a separately defined table. Therefore, a different display mode pattern can be determined depending on the model of the pachinko machine 200A, or the same display mode pattern can be determined regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 200A.

The display screen types are the same as the display screen types described above, and the identification numbers of the six types of display screens (1) to (6) are defined.
The display screen name is the same as the display screen name described above, and the names of display screens corresponding to the six types of display screens (1) to (6) are defined.
The display pattern is a display pattern when information is displayed on each display screen, and one or more patterns are defined for each display screen.

  The display mode of the first display unit is a display mode in which information is displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400. The position at which the information is displayed, the color at which the information is displayed, and the size at which the information is displayed. Is stipulated. As for the display color and the display size, two types of “default” and “customization” are determined according to the display screen. “Default” means a setting (initial display setting) defined as an initial display, and “customization” means a setting (arbitrary display setting) that can be arbitrarily changed by a player through display customization described later. ) Means.

  The general game history data screen of the display screen (1) and the personal game history data screen of the display screen (2) include the general game history (common general game history and specific general game history) and individual game history (common personal game history and A display mode for displaying each of the individual personal game history is defined. Among these, regarding the special game history (the specific general game history and the specific individual game history), it is stipulated that the specific game history is displayed in a display mode capable of specifying the specific game history. Here, the display mode in which it is possible to specify that the game history is a specific game history is a display mode in which the player can specify that the game history is a specific game history. When the game history data screen displayed on the screen is browsed, any display mode that can easily recognize and grasp that the game history displayed there is a specific game history may be used.

This will be specifically described.
A display pattern PA-1 is defined for the general game history data screen of the display screen (1). In the display pattern PA-1, as a position for displaying information, (a) common total game history information in the general individual frame (first initial setting position), (b) in the general special frame (second initial setting) It is stipulated that the total game history information unique to each position is displayed. The individual frame for general use is a frame for displaying common general game history information individually, and various items included in the common general game history information are displayed in separate frames (in individual frames). Is stipulated. The total number of individual frames is set as many as the number of items included in the common total game history information, and the arrangement position of these total individual frames on the display screen is defined as a first initial setting position (can be arbitrarily set). Yes.

  The general special frame is a frame for displaying the specific general game history information, and various items included in the specific general game history information are displayed together in one frame regardless of the number and type of items. It is stipulated to do. In other words, the specific general game history information is determined to be displayed in a display area different from the display area for displaying the common general game history regardless of the type of the information. The arrangement position of the general special frame on the display screen is determined as a second initial setting position (can be arbitrarily set: for example, at the lower center of the screen).

  In addition, regarding the colors for displaying the characters and numbers of the above various information, “black” is set as default, and “blue”, “green”, and “red” are set as customization. In addition, regarding the size for displaying the above characters and numbers, “small” is set as a default and “medium” is set as a customization.

  A display pattern PB-1 is defined for the personal game history data screen of the display screen (2). In the display pattern PB-1, as information display positions, (a) common individual game history information is displayed in the individual individual frame (third initial setting position), and (b) individual personal frame (fourth initial setting). It is stipulated that individual personal game history information is displayed at each position. Individual personal frame is a frame for displaying common personal game history information individually, and various items included in the common personal game history information are displayed in separate frames (in individual frames). Is stipulated. Individual personal frames are set by the number of items included in the common personal game history information, and the arrangement positions of these personal individual frames on the display screen are determined as third initial setting positions (which can be arbitrarily set). Yes.

  The personal specific frame is a frame for displaying the specific personal game history information, and various items included in the specific personal game history information are displayed together in one frame regardless of the number or type of items. It is stipulated to do. That is, the specific personal game history information is determined to be displayed in a display area different from the display area for displaying the common personal game history regardless of the type of the information. In addition, the arrangement position of the personal specific frame on the display screen can be arbitrarily determined as a fourth initial setting position (which can be arbitrarily set: for example, the center right portion of the screen).

  Note that the type and number of information included in each game history information differs between the common general game history information and the common individual game history information. For this reason, the initial setting positions are determined so that the general individual frame and the individual individual frame are arranged differently. Also, the specific general game history information and the specific personal game history information are displayed together in the general special frame and the personal specific frame, respectively. In this case, the initial setting position may be determined so that the general special frame and the personal specific frame are arranged at the same position, or the initial setting position is set so as to be arranged at different positions. You may keep it.

  As described above, the specific game history information (specific general game history information, specific individual game history information) is determined to be displayed together in a specific frame (total general frame, personal specific frame). Yes. That is, the specific game history is displayed on the data display device 400 in a display mode different from the common game history.

  In addition, regarding the colors for displaying the characters and numbers of the above various information, “black” is set as default, and “blue”, “green”, and “red” are set as customization. In addition, regarding the size for displaying the above characters and numbers, “small” is set as a default and “medium” is set as a customization.

A display pattern PC-1 is defined for the big hit history graph screen of the display screen (3).
In the display pattern PC-1, it is determined that a history graph is displayed in the center frame of the screen as a position for displaying information. As for the background color for displaying the history graph, “blue” is set as default, and “green” and “red” are set as customization. As for the size of the history graph to be displayed, “large” is set as a default, and “small” and “medium” are set as customization.

Display patterns PD-1 to PD-3 are defined for the payout graph screen of the display screen (4).
In the display pattern PD-1, it is determined that a daily payout graph is displayed in the center frame of the screen as a position for displaying information. As for the background color for displaying the daily payout graph, “blue” is set as a default, and “green” and “red” are set as customization. In addition, regarding the size of displaying the daily payout graph, “medium” as default and “small” and “large” as customization are defined.

  In the display pattern PD-2, as a position for displaying information, it is determined to display a stand-by-stand chart on the center frame of the screen. For the background color for displaying the stand-by-stand chart, “green” is set as default, and “blue” and “red” are set as customization. In addition, with respect to the size for displaying the stand-by-stand chart, “medium” is set as default, and “small” and “large” are set as customization.

  In the display pattern PD-3, as a position for displaying information, it is determined that a personalized ball graph is displayed in the center frame of the screen. As for the background color for displaying the personalized ball graph, “red” is set as a default, and “blue” and “green” are set as customization. In addition, regarding the size for displaying the individual ball graph, “medium” is set as a default, and “small” and “large” are set as customization.

Display patterns PE-1 to PE-3 are defined for the special image screen of the display screen (5).
In the display pattern PE-1, a screen center frame is defined as a position for displaying information. As a display color of the dollar box image, “green” is set as default and “red” is set as customization. As the display color of the special box image, “red” as a default and “rainbow” as a customization are defined. In addition, as a display size of the dollar box image, “small” as a default and “medium” as a customization are defined. In addition, as a display size of the special box image, “medium” as a default and “large” as a customization are defined.

  In the display pattern PE-2, a screen center frame is defined as a position for displaying information. Then, “white” is set as the default display color of the thousand-thousand box image, and “silver” is set as the customization. In addition, as the display color of the car box image, “red” is set as default and “gold” is set as customization. Further, “small” as the default and “medium” as the customization are defined as the display size of the thousand-thousand box image. In addition, as the display size of the car box image, “medium” as default and “large” as customization are defined.

  In the display pattern PE-3, a screen center frame is defined as a position for displaying information. As a display color of the ball 1 image, “silver” as a default and “gold” as a customization are defined. In addition, “silver” is set as a default and “gold” is set as a customization as a display color of the ball 2 image. Further, “small” as the default and “medium” as the customization are defined as the display size of the ball 1 image. Further, “small” as the default and “large” as the customization are determined as the display size of the image 2 of the ball bulk.

  In the present embodiment, the display screens (1) to (5) are displayed when a player or another player performs a display customization operation on the data display device 400 according to the display pattern defined for each display screen as described above. ), It is possible to customize (change) the color and size of information (letters, numbers, background) displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, about the display screen of some or all of the display screens (1) to (5), the information displayed on the display screen is not displayed on a different display screen, but the same display screen. You may make it display on.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of the specific game history display mode setting table 6831. As shown in FIG.
The unique game history display mode setting table 6831 includes a display mode for displaying the specific total game history information on the total game history data screen of the display screen (1) and a specific individual game on the personal game history data screen of the display screen (2). It is a table in which display modes for displaying history information are respectively determined.

  In the unique game history display mode setting table 6831, a display screen type, a display screen name, a display item, and a display mode are defined in association with each model name of the pachinko machine 200A. In the display mode, the display position of the special frame for displaying the special game history collectively, the display title in the special frame, the frame type of the special frame, the display color of the special game history information to be displayed in the special frame, The presence / absence of an item description of the specific game history information to be displayed in the specific frame is determined.

  In the display screen type, (1) and (2) are defined as the types of the display screen described above, and the general game history data screen and the personal game history data screen are defined as the corresponding display screen names. It has been.

  For the total game history data screen, specific total game history information is defined as a display item. Then, the display position of the total special frame for displaying the specific total game history information collectively, the display title in the total special frame, the frame type of the total special frame, and the specific total to be displayed in the total special frame The display color of the game history information and the presence / absence of the item description of the specific general game history information to be displayed in the general special frame are determined.

  Specifically, two types of setting positions, (A11) first setting position and (A12) second setting position, are defined for the special frame display position. These set positions can be determined in advance as arbitrary positions in the display screen, and may be set positions different from the first set position and the second set position. For example, the first setting position can be determined as the screen center right position, and the second setting position can be determined as the screen center left position.

  Three types of titles are defined for the display title: (A21) a comprehensive game history, (A22) a compatible model comprehensive game history, and (A23) a model-specific total game history. These display titles are display titles indicating that the game history is specific to the model of the pachinko machine 200A. By displaying these display titles, the player can display the displayed game history specific to the model. It becomes possible to grasp at a glance that it is the total game history.

  Three types of frames are defined: (A31) double frame, (A32) hollow frame, and (A33) canvas frame. The double frame is a frame surrounded by a double line. A hollow frame is a frame displayed so that the inside of a frame may be depressed. The canvas frame is a frame displayed like a bottom surface buried in the canvas or a top surface floating from the canvas.

  Three types of display colors are defined: (A41) blue, (A42) green, and (A43) red.

  There are two types of item descriptions: (A51) present and (A52) absent. With explanation is to display an explanation so that the player can understand what each piece of information included in the specific general game history information means, and without explanation, the above explanation is not displayed. To do. As will be described later, the specific total game history information includes items such as the ST rush number, the short time rush number, and the ST rush rate. When there is a description, for example, the display position corresponding to these pieces of information is tapped by the player, so that an explanation of what the corresponding item is means by a pop-up display etc. Display.

  In addition, specific personal game history information is defined as a display target for the personal game history data screen. The display position of the personal special frame for displaying the individual personal game history information collectively, the display title in the personal special frame, the frame type of the personal special frame, and the specific individual to be displayed in the personal specific frame The display color of the game history information and the presence / absence of the item description of the specific personal game history information to be displayed in the personal specific frame are determined.

  Two types of positions, (B11) third set position and (B12) fourth set position, are defined as the special frame display position. These set positions can be determined in advance as arbitrary positions in the display screen, and may be set positions different from the third set position and the fourth set position. For example, the third setting position can be set as the lower right position of the screen, and the fourth setting position can be set as the lower left position of the screen.

  The third setting position and the fourth setting position may be determined as the same position as the setting position of either the first setting position or the second setting position, or may be determined as different positions. .

  In the display title, three types of titles are defined: (B21) personal game history, (B22) compatible model personal game history, and (B23) model-specific personal game history. These display titles are display titles indicating that they are individual game histories specific to the model of the pachinko machine 200A. By displaying these display titles, the player can display the displayed game history specific to the model. It becomes possible to grasp at a glance that it is the personal game history.

  Three types of frames are defined: (B31) double frame, (B32) floating frame, and (B33) canvas frame. The floating frame is a frame that is displayed so as to float inside the frame.

  Three types of colors are defined as display colors: (B41) purple, (B42) red, and (B43) rainbow.

  There are two types of item descriptions: (B51) explanation and (B52) no explanation. With explanation is to display an explanation so that the player can understand what each piece of information included in the specific personal game history information means, and without explanation, the above explanation is hidden. To do. As will be described later, the specific individual game history information includes items such as the number of withdrawals within the remaining 10 rotations, the number of time withdrawals, and the ST withdrawal rate. When there is a description, for example, the display position corresponding to these pieces of information is tapped by the player, so that an explanation of what the corresponding item is means by a pop-up display etc. Display.

  As described above, the specific game history information is collectively displayed in the special frame, and a display title indicating the specific game history is displayed in the special frame. Therefore, when viewing the game history data screen displayed on the display unit 430 of the data display device 400, the player recognizes and grasps at a glance that the information displayed in the specific frame is the specific game history. can do.

  In the first display unit display mode setting table 683a, the special game history is not displayed in the special frame, but each item included in the special game history is displayed without providing the special frame. May be. In this case, since the player cannot recognize that the game is a specific game history by the frame, any one of the display position, display color and display size of the specific game history, or two or more of them is set as the common game history. It only has to be different. Specifically, the special game history is displayed at a position different from the common game history, the special game history is displayed in a color different from the common game history, or the special game history is displayed in a size different from the common game history. Thus, the player can recognize and grasp that the game history is the specific game history.

  In the present embodiment, the player and other players perform a display customization operation on the data display device 400 according to the display mode defined for each game history data screen as described above, and thereby the general game history data screen and The personal game history data screen is configured such that the display mode (layout) for displaying the specific general game history and the specific personal game history can be customized. That is, the specific game history can be displayed in a display mode that can identify the specific game history. In addition, the specific game history can be displayed in a display mode different from the common game history.

  It should be noted that the display mode of both the specific general game history and the specific individual game history is not customized, but only the display mode of either the specific total game history or the specific individual game history is customized. Of course, you may do it.

  FIG. 11 shows an example of the table configuration of the second display unit display mode setting table 683b. Similarly to the first display unit display mode setting table 683a, the display type, display pattern, and second display unit 440 are displayed. The display mode is determined in association with it. As described above, two types of display, “normal” and “simultaneous production”, are defined.

  “Pattern P, pattern Q, pattern R, pattern S,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “normal”. As the display mode of the second display unit 440, “full screen vacancy information” is displayed for “pattern P”, “full screen big hit information” is displayed for “pattern Q”, and “full screen latency probability change” is displayed for “pattern R”. “Information” and “Pattern S” are respectively determined to display “full-screen time information”. The pattern P is a pattern for displaying the “vacant stand” on the entire display screen, the pattern Q is a pattern for displaying the “latency probability changing state” on the entire display screen, and the pattern S is a display This is a pattern for displaying the “short time state” on the entire screen. Specific examples of these displays will be described later as a display screen example of the second display unit 440.

  “Pattern p, pattern q, pattern r,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “simultaneous effect”. As the display mode of the second display unit 440, “full screen store advertising information” is displayed for “pattern p”, “full screen new stand replacement information” is displayed for “pattern q”, and “full screen store information” is displayed for “pattern r”. It is determined that “event information” is displayed.

  In the display mode setting table 683, it is determined in what display mode information to be displayed is displayed on the display unit of the data display device 400, and the processing unit 610 includes the display mode setting table. By creating display setting data 691 using 683, the display mode of the data display device 400 is set. Therefore, the hall computer 600 has a display mode setting unit for setting the display mode of the data display device 400 in addition to the display content setting unit and the display condition setting unit.

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of the game history information tabulation table 684.
The game history information tabulation table 684 is a table for performing settings related to the tabulation of game history information by the data display device 400, and includes a common game history information tabulation table and a specific game history information tabulation table. .

  In the common game history information tabulation table, types, tabulation items, and execution processes are stored in association with each other.

  The type is a type of common game history information, and “general” and “individual” are defined. “Total” corresponds to the above-described common general game history information, and “Individual” corresponds to the above-described common individual game history information.

The total item is a total item of common game history information corresponding to the type.
For the type “comprehensive”, (1) probability variation jackpot count, (2) normal jackpot count, and (3) start count for the pachinko machine 200A are defined. The start count is the number of changes in the pachinko machine 200A, and is reset to 0 when a big hit occurs. In addition to these, the “big hit count” calculated by summing the probability variation hit count and the normal hit count may be set as a total item of the common general game history information.

  In addition, for the type “individual”, (1) the probability variation jackpot number, (2) the normal jackpot count, and (3) the maximum number of extended villas of the individual who played the game with the pachinko machine 200 are determined. ing. The maximum number of extended resorts is the maximum number of times that the big hits are continuously generated in the probability variation state. In this case as well, the “big hit count” calculated by summing the probability variation hit count and the normal hit count may be set as a total item of the common personal game history information.

  Note that the total items of the common game history information described above are merely examples, and other types of total items may be determined. For example, as the total items of the common general game history information, the maximum number of extended games and the total number of start times (total number of times of change) in the pachinko machine 200A may be determined, or as the total items of the common individual game history information. The average number of extended games and the total number of start times (total number of fluctuations) of the individual player may be determined.

  The execution process is a process to be executed in accordance with the type, and for the type “total”, it is determined to execute the common total game history information aggregation process. Further, for the type “individual”, it is stipulated that common personal game history information aggregation processing is executed.

  The specific game history information tabulation table stores a model, a type, a tabulation item, and an execution process in association with each other.

The model is a model of the pachinko machine 200A, and a plurality of models of the pachinko machine 200A such as “pachinko XXX” and “pachinko YYY” are defined.
The type is a type of specific game history information, and “general” and “individual” are defined. “Total” corresponds to the above-described specific general game history information, and “individual” corresponds to the above-described specific individual game history information.

  The total item is a total item of specific game history information corresponding to the model and type. For the model “Pachinko XXX”, for the type “general”, (1) the number of ST rushes, (2) the number of short-time rushes, and (3) the ST rush rate are defined.

The number of times of ST entry is the number of times of entry into the ST state after a big hit in the normal state.
The number of times of short-term rushing is the number of times of rushing into the short-time state after a big hit in the normal state.
The ST rush rate is a ratio (%) of rushing into the ST state, and is calculated as [ST rush number / (ST rush number + short time rush number)] × 100.

  On the other hand, for the type “individual”, (1) the number of pullbacks within the remaining 10 rotations, (2) the number of short pullbacks, and (3) the ST pullback rate are defined.

The number of ST pullbacks within the remaining 10 rotations is the number of times ST pullback has occurred due to a big hit within the remaining 10 rotations in the ST state. As described above, ST pullback means winning a big hit in the ST state.
The number of time pullbacks is the number of times the time pullback has occurred due to a big hit in the time-short state. As described above, the time pullback means that a win is won in the time shortening state.
The ST pullback rate is a ratio (%) at which ST pullback occurs, and is calculated as [ST pullback count / (ST pullback count + number of ST pullbacks not generated)] × 100.

  In the present embodiment, the number of withdrawals within the remaining 10 rotations as the individual personal game history information relating to the withdrawal in the ST state will be described. However, the number of withdrawals within 10 rotations is merely an example, and is within 10 rotations. Instead, it may be a specified number of times such as 5 rotations or 15 rotations. Further, the prescribed number of times may be set by the player performing a setting operation, or may be set on the store side.

  In addition to the number of time pullbacks, the time pullback rate and the average number of time pullbacks may be aggregated. In addition to the ST pullback rate, the ST pullback count and the ST pullback average count may be totaled. That is, it is possible to appropriately set what kind of information is totaled as the specific individual game history information.

  In addition, regarding “pachinko XXX”, for the type “general”, it is determined to execute the first specific total game history information aggregation process. In the first specific total game history information totaling process, (1) the number of times of entering ST, (2) the number of times of short rushing, and (3) the rate of entering the ST are totaled. In addition, for the type “individual”, it is determined that the first specific individual game history information aggregation process is executed. In this first specific individual game history information tabulation process, (1) the number of pullbacks within the remaining 10 rotations, (2) the number of short pullbacks, and (3) the ST pullback rate determined for the corresponding tabulation items are tabulated.

  For the model “Pachinko YYY”, for the type “general”, (1) the number of 16 rounds probable big hits and (2) the number of 5 rounds probable big hits is defined. In addition, for the type “individual”, (1) 16 round probability variation big hits number of times, (2) short pullback times, and (3) latent probability variation big hit numbers are defined.

  In addition, regarding “pachinko YYY”, for the type “general”, it is determined to execute the second specific total game history information aggregation process. In this second specific total game history information tabulation process, (1) the number of 16 rounds probable big hits and (2) the number of five rounds probable big hits specified in the corresponding tabulation items are tabulated. In addition, for the type “individual”, it is determined to execute the second specific individual game history information aggregation process. In this second specific total game history information tabulation process, (1) the number of 16 round probability change big hits, (2) the number of short pullbacks, and (3) the latent probability change big hits defined in the corresponding tabulation items are tabulated.

  The data display device management table 685 is a table for managing each data display device 400 installed in the store, and is provided in association with the device ID of each data display device 400 and corresponding to the data display device 400. The ID and type (model, type, genre, loan rate, etc.) of the received pachinko machine 200A are stored.

  The loan rate may be set in a unit management table (unit management table) as a setting item of a unit (inter-counter counting unit 500 or card unit 300) provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 200A. .

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the general game history database 686.
The total game history database 686 stores a plurality of total game history data. In each total game history data, common total game history data and unique total game history data are stored for each date and pachinko machine ID. In FIG. 13, the highest level total game history data is data obtained by tabulating the total game history in the pachinko machine 200 </ b> A with the date “○ month × day” and the pachinko machine ID “P1”.

  Common general game history data stores common general game history information. In the example of FIG. 13, the common total game history information includes the probability variation jackpot count, the normal jackpot count, and the start count.

  In the specific total game history data, specific total game history information is stored. In the example of FIG. 13, the specific total game history information includes the number of ST rushes, the number of time rushes, and the ST rush rate.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the personal game history database 687. As shown in FIG.
The personal game history database 687 stores a plurality of personal game history data. Each individual game history data includes, for each date and individual ID, password data that is password data set by the player, and a plurality of common individual game history data corresponding to the pachinko machine 200A in which the player has played a game. In addition, a plurality of unique individual game history data is stored. In FIG. 14, the top personal game history data is data with the date “○ month × day” and the personal ID “K0001”.

  Each common personal game history data stores the ID of the pachinko machine 200A played by the player with the personal ID, the model name of the pachinko machine 200A, and the common personal game history information. In the example of FIG. 14, the common individual game history information includes the probability variation jackpot count, the normal jackpot count, and the maximum number of extended games.

  In each individual personal game history data, the ID of the pachinko machine 200A played by the player with the personal ID, the model name of the pachinko machine 200A, and the specific personal game history information are stored. In the example of FIG. 14, the specific individual game history information includes the number of withdrawals within the remaining 10 rotations, the number of time withdrawals, and the ST withdrawal rate.

  The sales management database 689 is a database in which data related to sales in the pachinko machine 200A installed in the store is stored. The sales management database 689 stores sales management data for managing information related to store sales. For example, the sales management data (the machine number and the premium rate), the payout rate, the customer delay rate, the sales balls, the premium balls, Data for sales management such as the amount of free gifts and the gross profit of the ball is tabulated by the processing unit 610 and stored.

  The RAM 690 is a readable / writable volatile memory, and in this embodiment, display setting data 691 in which display contents, display conditions, and display modes for each data display device 400 are set is stored. The RAM 690 is backed up by a battery (not shown), and data stored for a predetermined period is retained even when the power is turned off.

  The display setting data 691 is set individually for each data display device 400 by the processing unit 610 based on the display content setting table 681, the simultaneous effect display setting table 682, and the display mode setting table 683 described above. FIG. 15 shows an example of the data configuration.

  The display setting data 691 includes a data display device ID that is an ID of the data display device 400 to which the display setting data 691 is applied, and an ID of the pachinko machine 200A provided corresponding to the data display device 400. A corresponding pachinko machine ID, display content setting data for each display device, and display mode setting data for each display device are included.

  In the display content setting data for each display device, the first display portion display content setting data in which the display content of the first display portion 430 is set, and the second display portion display content setting data in which the display content of the second display portion 440 is set. And are included.

  Further, in the display mode setting data for each display device, the first display unit display mode setting data in which the display mode of the first display unit 430 is set and the second display unit display mode in which the display mode of the second display unit 440 is set. Configuration data. The first display unit display mode setting data includes specific game history display mode setting data in which the display mode of the specific game history information is set.

  The processing unit 610 includes a display content setting table 681, a simultaneous effect display setting table 682, and a display mode setting table 683 (a first display unit display mode setting table 683a, a specific personal game history display mode setting table 6831, Display setting data 691 (FIG. 15) to be applied to each data display device 400 is generated based on the contents defined in the second display section display mode setting table 683b), and the generated display setting data 691 is generated. Are distributed to the corresponding data display device 400.

  The setting data for aggregation 693 is setting data for aggregation of game history information that the processing unit 610 individually sets for each data display device 400 based on the above-described game history information aggregation table 684. An example of the configuration is shown in FIG.

  The setting data for aggregation 693 includes a data display device ID that is an ID of the data display device 400 to which the setting data for aggregation 693 is applied, and a model of the pachinko machine 200A provided corresponding to the data display device 400. A corresponding pachinko machine model, common game history information tabulation data, and specific game history information tabulation data are included.

  The processing unit 610 generates aggregation setting data 693 (FIG. 16) to be applied to each data display device 400 based on the contents defined in the game history information aggregation table 684 and the data display device management table 685, respectively. Then, the generated setting data for aggregation 693 is distributed to the corresponding data display device 400. That is, the hall computer 600 can individually set the types of gaming machines corresponding to the plurality of information display devices, and functions as a management device that distributes the type setting information to the corresponding information display devices. In the present embodiment, the tabulation setting data 693 corresponds to the type setting information.

[1-6. Configuration of data display device]
17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of an external configuration of the data display device 400. FIG.
The data display device 400 includes a first display unit 430 that displays game history information based on at least information output from the pachinko machine 200A for a player who plays with the pachinko machine 200A, and a game that plays with the pachinko machine 200A. And a second display unit 440 that displays information for players other than the player, that is, surrounding players.

  Further, in the data display device 400, a speaker as the sound output unit 450 is installed in the central part of the upper surface of the housing so that the sound output port faces the front. Note that the installation position of the speaker can be changed as appropriate. For example, the speaker may be installed at either the left or right position on the upper surface of the housing or at a predetermined position on the side of the housing of the data display device 400.

  In the following description, based on a player who plays a game with a pachinko machine 200A, the front and back directions with respect to the player are the front and rear directions, the right and left directions with respect to the player are the left and right directions, and the player is the reference. Up and down directions are defined as up and down directions, respectively.

  FIGS. 17A and 17B are perspective views of the data display device 400. FIG. The housing of the data display device 400 has a base portion 4A having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a door portion configured to project forward from the right end portion and the left end portion of the base portion 4A. 4B. The left and right door portions 4B are designed so that the width thereof is half the width of the base portion 4A.

  FIG. 17 (3) is a front view of the data display device 400. A first display portion 430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is formed on the front surface of the base portion 4A. The first display unit 430 is formed in a direction facing the player, and a player who plays with the pachinko machine 200A can visually recognize the first display unit 430 from the game position. That is, the first display unit 430 is formed in a direction in which the player can visually recognize the game position from which the player plays.

  FIG. 17 (4) is a right side view of the data display device 400. A second display portion 440 that displays information for a player other than the player who plays with the pachinko machine 200A is formed on one of the left and right surfaces of the door portion 4B. The second display portion 440 is formed on the right side of the right door portion 4B when viewed from the player and on the left side of the left door portion 4B when viewed from the player. That is, the 2nd display part 440 is formed in the outer surface of each door part 4B, and the player cannot visually recognize the 2nd display part 440 from a game position. On the other hand, a player other than a player who does not look at the pachinko machine 200A from the front, for example, a player who selects the pachinko machine 200A that starts the game by looking at the pachinko machine 200A of the game island from the edge of the game island, The second display unit 440 can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (2), the left and right door portions 4B are configured to be foldable and retractable inward. Specifically, the left and right door portions 4B can be folded inward by hinge portions 4C, respectively. Since the width of the left and right door portions 4B is designed to be half the width of the base portion 4A excluding the hinge portion 4C, when the left and right door portions 4B are closed, the base portion 4A just overlaps. At this time, the left and right door portions 4B are parallel to the base portion 4A, and the first display portion 430 is covered with the left and right door portions 4B. Since the left and right door portions 4B can be folded inward in this manner, the left and right door portions 4B are folded when the data display device 400 is installed on the game island or removed from the game island. The installation work and the removal work can be easily performed.

  In addition, the second display unit 440 is formed on an outer surface that is not visible to the player when the door unit 4B is opened. However, when the door unit 4B is closed, the player displays the second display unit 440. It will be in a state visible from the front. Thus, in the data display device 400, the first display unit 430 is visible to the player, but the second display unit 440 is not visible to the player (while the players other than the player are visible). 1 state (a state in which the second display unit 440 is perpendicular to the first display unit 430) and the player cannot see the first display unit 430, but the second display unit 440 It is also possible to enter a second state (a state in which the second display unit 440 is parallel to the first display unit 430) that can be visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a detailed configuration of the second display unit 440. In this embodiment, the 2nd display part 440 is comprised so that attachment or detachment of the transparent plastic lid 447 which covers the whole 2nd display part 440 is carried out. The display surface of the second display portion 440 protrudes from the housing surface with the door portion 4B open (the right door portion 4B protrudes to the right, and the left door portion 4B protrudes to the left. And an outward fitting step portion 441 that forms a step between the housing surface of the second display portion 440 and the display surface of the second display portion 440 is provided.

  A plastic lid 447 shown in FIG. 18 is a lid member in which a peripheral wall 443 projects from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom plate 442, and has a tray shape in which the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 are integrally formed of a light-transmitting plastic material. Have. An inward fitting step 444 that forms a step between the surface of the bottom plate 442 where the peripheral wall 443 protrudes and the end surface (tray-shaped edge surface) of the peripheral wall 443 is provided. By fitting the mating step portion 444 with the outward fitting step portion 441, the inner surface of the inward fitting step portion 444 is engaged with the outer surface of the outward fitting step portion 441, and the plastic lid 447 The second display unit 440 is integrated.

  Further, the recess formed by the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 of the plastic lid 447 is configured to be able to insert a POP advertisement 445 for notifying the player of various types of information. In the POP advertisement 445, for example, information related to sales of a store where the pachinko machine 200A is installed and information related to an event performed in the store can be posted.

  In FIG. 18, as an example of the POP advertisement 445, a POP advertisement 445 indicating that the day is Ladies' Day, which is one of the event days, is illustrated. When the POP advertisement 445 is inserted into the recess of the plastic lid 447 and the inward fitting step 444 is fitted to the outward fitting step 441 of the door 4B, the POP advertisement 445 is attached to the bottom plate 442. It is supported by being sandwiched between the display surface of the second display unit 440 and covers the display screen of the second display unit 440.

  In addition, since the plastic lid 447 has translucency, the inserted POP advertisement 445 can be visually recognized by the player from the outside through the bottom plate 442. The pachinko machine 200A in which the Ladies' Day POP advertisement 445 is displayed on the corresponding data display device 400 is a stand only for women, and only women can play games.

  The POP advertisement is not limited to notifying the above-mentioned event day. For example, the new machine information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A installed corresponding to the data display device 400 is a new machine, and the pachinko machine 200A has 4 Various kinds of information such as a yen pachinko machine, a 2-yen pachinko machine, information indicating a 1-yen pachinko machine, and information indicating the model name of the pachinko machine 200A can be posted.

  Thus, by making it possible to attach the plastic lid 447 to the second display portion 440, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing information for players other than the player. Further, by attaching the plastic lid 447 with the POP advertisement interposed, the surrounding players can confirm information on the store and the pachinko machine 200A. In addition, when the second display unit 440 is covered with a POP advertisement or the like in this manner, the second display unit 440 displays that the latent probability change state is displayed, and the display is displayed to the player and other than the player. When the player does not want to show the player, the display on the second display unit 440 can be made invisible.

  Here, in order to set the second display unit 440 so as not to display that the latent probability changing state is displayed, the second display unit 440 is in the latent probability changing state on the hall computer 600 or each data display device 400 side. It is necessary to perform a setting process for preventing the message from being displayed. On the other hand, when the second display unit 440 is covered with a cover such as a POP advertisement, such setting processing is not required, and it is temporarily displayed on the second display unit 440 that the latent probability changing state is displayed. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player and players other than the player from seeing this.

  Also, for example, on an event day such as Ladies' Day, only the player (for example, female customer) who is the target of the event is operated so that the second display unit 440 can be viewed by removing the POP advertisement or the like. Also good. Furthermore, when a player (for example, a female customer) who is the subject of such an event plays a game, the POP advertisement is removed and the door 4B is folded inward (the second state described above). The second display unit 440 may be visible from the player, and the latent probability changing state may be displayed on the second display unit. According to this, only a specific player such as an event subject can view the display content of the second display unit 440.

  In FIG. 18, the plastic lid 447 is illustrated as a cover that covers the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400, but the cover is not limited thereto. If the cover is a lid, it is not limited to the plastic lid 447 but may be a glass lid or a wooden lid. Moreover, it is good also considering the housing surrounding the 2nd display part 440 as a cover other than a cover as a cover which concerns on this invention. The housing can be, for example, a colored plastic, vinyl, or wooden housing.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the housing in this case.
A housing 448 is detachably configured to surround the entire door portion 4B on which the second display portion 440 is formed. Specifically, a casing 448 formed in a U-shape in front view so as to surround a surface of the door portion 4B other than the bonding surface of the hinge portion 4C is configured to be attachable to the door portion 4B. By attaching such a housing 448 to the door portion 4B, it is possible to create a state in which the second display portion 440 cannot be further visually recognized by a player playing a game machine.

  Note that the housing 448 may have a bottomed structure including a bottom part surrounding the inner surface of the door part 4B, or may have a bottomless structure without a bottom part. When the bottomed structure is adopted, the inner surface of the door portion 4B is surrounded by the housing 448, so that even the inner surface of the door portion 4B cannot be seen by the player, as if the player It is possible to create a state as if they were isolated.

  In addition, the above-described cover is not necessarily a cover that covers the entire second display unit 440, and may be a cover that covers a part of the second display unit 440. For example, a cover that covers only the center of the second display unit 440 may be used, or a cover that covers the right half, the left half, the upper half, and the lower half of the second display unit 440. Moreover, it is good also as a cover body which covers the circumference | surroundings of the 2nd display part 440. FIG.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the data display device 400. Note that the same data as the data stored in the hall computer 600 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The data display device 400 includes a processing unit 410, an operation unit 420, a first display unit 430, a second display unit 440, a sound output unit 450, a light emitting unit 455, a clock unit 460, and short-range wireless communication. Unit 465, first communication unit 470, second communication unit 475, third communication unit 480, and storage unit 490.

  The processing unit 410 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control each unit of the data display device 400 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 490, such as a processor such as a CPU or DSP, an ASIC, or the like. The integrated circuit is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the processing unit 410 includes, as main functional units, an initial setting unit 411, a first display control unit 412, a second display control unit 413, a common total game history information totaling unit 414, and a specific total. A game history information totaling unit 415, a common personal game history information totaling unit 416, a specific personal game history information totaling unit 417, a special image display processing unit 418, and a code generation unit 419 are provided.

  The operation unit 420 is an input unit having a touch panel 421 configured integrally with the first display unit 430, and outputs an operation input signal for the touch panel 421 to the processing unit 410. By a tap operation on the touch panel 421, a player or another player can perform various instruction operations such as calling a store clerk, selecting a menu, selecting a service, and selecting a display screen.

  In addition to the touch panel 421, an operation button including a cross key and a determination button is configured on the operation unit 420, and the player and other players can perform the above-described various operations by pressing the operation button. It is good. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that various instruction operations are all performed by a tap operation on the touch panel 421.

  The first display unit 430 is a display formed on the base unit 4A as described above, and includes an LCD or the like, and various displays based on a display control signal output from the first display control unit 411. It is the display device which performs.

  The second display unit 440 is a display formed on the door unit 4B as described above, and includes an LCD or the like, and various displays based on display control signals output from the second display control unit 412. It is the display device which performs.

  The sound output unit 450 is a sound output device that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 410, and includes a speaker or the like. The sound output unit 450 is configured to output a specific sound and a confirmation sound in accordance with the control of the processing unit 410.

  The light emitting unit 455 is a light emitting device configured to include an effect lamp, a decoration LED, and the like, and can turn on / flash the effect lamp and the decoration LED with various emission colors according to the control of the processing unit 410. It is configured.

  The clock unit 460 is an internal clock of the data display device 400 and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The time measured (including the date) of the clock unit 465 is output to the processing unit 410.

  The short-range wireless communication unit 465 is a communication device for performing short-range communication with an external device such as the mobile phone 16A possessed by the player, and is close to the external device under the control of the processing unit 410. Send and receive data via range wireless communication.

  The first communication unit 470 is a communication device for performing communication with the pachinko machine 200A, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The first communication unit 470 has a parallel communication terminal and receives various game signals from the pachinko machine 200A according to the parallel communication method. In addition, you may comprise the 1st communication part 470 so that a game signal may be received not by a parallel communication system but by a serial communication system.

  When the pachinko machine 200A is an encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, the first communication unit 470 is provided with a serial communication terminal for receiving a game signal including information about points from the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B in the serial communication system. The game signal may be received from the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B according to the serial communication method. In addition, the first communication unit 470 does not receive a game signal from the pachinko machine 200A or the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, but the game of the corresponding game machine from the unit (the inter-unit counting unit 500 or the card unit 300). You may make it receive the various information (game information) concerning.

  The second communication unit 475 is a communication device for performing communication with the hall computer 600, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. Second communication unit 475 has a parallel communication terminal, and receives display setting data 691, totaling setting data 693, and a display instruction signal including a simultaneous effect display instruction signal from hall computer 600 according to the parallel communication method.

  The third communication unit 480 is a communication device for performing communication with the inter-counter counting unit 500, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The third communication unit 480 has a parallel communication terminal, and receives the possession ball number signal from the inter-counter counting unit 500 according to the parallel communication method.

  The storage unit 490 is a storage device including a volatile or nonvolatile memory such as a ROM, a flash ROM, or a RAM.

  The storage unit 490 stores a main program 491 that is read by the processing unit 410 and executed as a main process. The main program 491 includes a display program 491a executed as display processing, a common general game history information totaling program 491b executed as common general game history information totaling processing, and a common individual executed as common personal game history information totaling processing. A game history information totaling program 491c, a plurality of specific total game history information totaling programs 491d executed as a specific total game history information totaling process for each type of pachinko machine 200A, and a specific individual game history information for each type of pachinko machine 200A A specific personal game history information aggregation program 491e executed as the aggregation process and a special image display program 491f executed as the special image display process are included as subroutines.

  The storage unit 490 also has display image data 492, simultaneous effect video data 493, special image display threshold table 495, possession ball count data 496, general game history data 497, and personal game history data 498. Display setting data 691 and tabulation setting data 693 are stored.

  The display image data 492 is image data to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440. In the present embodiment, the display image data 492 includes data of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image when the special image display is performed.

  The simultaneous effect video data 493 is video data of the simultaneous effect displayed on the first display unit 430 during the simultaneous effect of the pachinko machine 200A. The simultaneous effect video data 493 includes video data for performing a big hit running effect, promotional video data of the pachinko machine 200A, hidden character and mascot character video data of the pachinko machine 200A, and live video data of the pachinko machine 200A. Includes various video data.

The special image display threshold value table 495 is a table that defines display threshold values for the number of possessed balls when the first display unit 430 performs special image display. An example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the special image display threshold table 495, four special image display thresholds are defined, which are a first display threshold, a first non-display threshold, a second display threshold, and a second non-display threshold.

The first display threshold is a threshold for the number of local counting balls for displaying the first predetermined image, and for example, 1000 shots are set. The first display threshold corresponds to the first value.
The first non-display threshold is a threshold for the number of local counting balls for making the first predetermined image non-display, and, for example, 800 shots are set. The first non-display threshold corresponds to the second value.

  The first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value are determined to have a difference corresponding to a predetermined number of balls (hereinafter referred to as “first predetermined number”). Specifically, since the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the first non-display threshold is 800 shots, the first non-display threshold is set to a value 200 smaller than the first display threshold as the first predetermined number. It has been. As described above, the difference between the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value by the first predetermined number is the display non-display of the first predetermined image by increasing / decreasing the number of local counting balls just before the threshold value. Is intended to prevent frequent switching.

  In the present embodiment, the first predetermined number of 200 shots is set based on the number by which the player's local counting ball number decreases at a predetermined opportunity. In the present embodiment, a case where the predetermined opportunity is a one-time payout of a game ball by a player's refund operation is illustrated. With the player's refund operation, 125 game balls are refunded to the player at a time. That is, the number of local count balls of the player that is reduced by one refund operation is 125 shots. The first predetermined number is 200 shots with a margin of 75 shots for the refund number of 125 shots.

The second display threshold is a threshold for the number of local counting balls for displaying the second predetermined image, and for example, 5000 shots are set. The second display threshold corresponds to the third value.
The second non-display threshold is a threshold for the number of local counting balls for making the second predetermined image non-display, and for example, 4600 shots are set. The second non-display threshold corresponds to the fourth value.

  The second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value are also determined to have a difference corresponding to a predetermined number of balls (hereinafter referred to as “second predetermined number”). Specifically, in the above example, the second display threshold value is 5000 shots and the second non-display threshold value is 4600 shots. Therefore, the second non-display threshold value is 400 as the second predetermined number rather than the second display threshold value. A small value is set. In this way, the second predetermined threshold is given a difference between the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold. The display of the second predetermined image is not displayed by increasing or decreasing the number of local count balls just before the threshold. Is intended to prevent frequent switching.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the threshold value is set so that the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number. In the above example, since the first predetermined number is 200 and the second predetermined number is 400, the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number. The purpose of this is to make conditions for non-display of the second predetermined image stricter than conditions for non-display of the first predetermined image. The second predetermined image is a special image different from the first predetermined image to be displayed when the special image display threshold reaches a large number such as 5000 shots or 10,000 shots, and gives the player a sense of superiority, The second predetermined image is less likely to be hidden as compared to the first predetermined image.

Note that the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number need to be numbers that do not exceed the first display threshold.
In the above example, the number (200 shots) with a margin for the number (125 shots) in which the number of local counting balls of the player is reduced by one refund operation is determined as the first predetermined number. Instead of this, the number (125 shots) by which the player's local counting ball number is reduced by one refund operation may be determined as the first predetermined number. The first predetermined number may be determined based on the first display threshold. In this case, a number that is preferably 1/3 or less of the first display threshold value, more preferably a number that is 1/5 or less of the first display threshold value, is set as the first predetermined number.

  In the present embodiment, the second predetermined number is described as being greater than the first predetermined number. However, the same number as the first predetermined number may be determined as the second predetermined number. Good. That is, in the above example, the second predetermined number may be the same 200 as the first predetermined number. However, it is desirable that the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number, and it is preferable to set a number about 1.5 to 2 times the first predetermined number as the second predetermined number. .

  The possession ball number data 496 is data storing the number of possession balls of the player who plays with the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400, and is received and updated from the inter-unit counting unit 500 at an intermittent timing. The

  The total game history data 497 is data obtained by tabulating total game history information in the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400. The total game history data 497 includes common total game history data in which common total game history information is totaled and specific total game history data in which specific total game history information is totaled.

  The personal game history data 498 is data obtained by tabulating personal game history information of a player who played with the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400. The personal game history data 498 includes common personal game history data in which common personal game history information is totaled and specific individual game history data in which specific personal game history information is totaled.

  The display setting data 691 is display setting data received from the hall computer 600 via the second communication unit 480, and the data structure is as described with reference to FIG.

  The totaling setting data 693 is setting data for totaling game history information received from the hall computer 600 via the second communication unit 480, and the data structure is as described with reference to FIG.

[1-7. Process flow]
[1-7-1. Hall computer processing]
22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of management processing executed by the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 in accordance with the management program 671 stored in the ROM 670.

  The processing unit 610 performs loop A processing for each data display device 400 (A1 to A15). The loop A means that each step in the loop A is executed for each data display device 400 in order or in parallel.

  In loop A, the display setting unit 611 performs display setting processing for the data display device 400 (A3). Specifically, using the display content setting table 681, the simultaneous effect display setting table 682, the display mode setting table 683, and the data display device management table 685 stored in the hard disk 680, the data display device 400 is displayed. Display setting data 691 is generated and stored in the RAM 690 (A5). Then, the generated display setting data 691 is transmitted to the data display device 400 (A7).

  Next, the tabulation setting unit 612 performs tabulation setting processing for the data display device 400 (A9). Specifically, using the game history information tabulation table 684 and the data display device management table 685 stored in the hard disk 680, the tabulation setting data 693 of the data display device 400 is generated and stored in the RAM 690 ( A11). Then, the generated setting data for aggregation 693 is transmitted to the data display device 400 (A13).

  The generation of the setting data is a process that is first performed when, for example, the hall computer 600 is turned on and business management is started on a business day, and each data display device 400 performs an initial setting. Therefore, it is transmitted only once to each data display device 400. If the correspondence relationship between the pachinko machine 200A and the data display device 400 does not change, the display method and the counting method in the data display device 400 may be the same. The setting data may be generated and transmitted only when the correspondence relationship with 400 changes.

  When the processing of the loop A for all the next data display devices 400 is completed (A15), the processing unit 610 performs the processing of the loop B for each pachinko machine 200A (A17 to A23). Loop B means that each step in loop B is executed in order or in parallel with each pachinko machine 200A.

  In the loop B, the processing unit 610 receives a game signal from the pachinko machine 200A via the first communication unit 640 (A19). Then, the processing unit 610 determines the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200A based on the received gaming signal (A21). Then, the processing unit 610 shifts the processing to the next pachinko machine 200A.

  When the processing of the loop B for all the pachinko machines 200A is completed (A23), the processing unit 610 performs the processing of the loop C for each data display device 400 (A25 to A35). In the loop C, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not the total game history data (common total game history data and unique total game history data) is received from the data display device 400 (A27), and determines that it has been received. If so (A27; Yes), the received total game history data is stored in the total game history database 686 of the hard disk 680 (A29).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not personal game history data (common personal game history data and unique personal game history data) has been received from the data display device 400 (A31). (A31; Yes), the received personal game history data is stored in the personal game history database 687 of the hard disk 680 (A33).

  Note that the game signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 200A is not stored in the database based on the total game history data or the personal game history data received from the data display device 400, but in the database. Alternatively, based on the information output from the unit, the hall computer 600 may collect the total game history data and the individual game history data separately from the data display device 400 and store them in the database.

  If the processing of loop C for all the data display devices 400 is completed (A35), the processing unit 610 determines whether or not the display condition for the big hit running effect is satisfied (A37), and if it is determined that it is satisfied. If (A37; Yes), a big hit running effect display instruction signal is transmitted to each data display device 400 (A39). At this time, in order to cause the data display device 400 to perform a big hit running effect with a predetermined time difference, a big hit running effect display instruction signal is applied to each data display device 400 with a delay corresponding to the time difference described above. Send. Then, the processing unit 610 moves the process to A45.

  As described above, in the same model of the pachinko machine 200A, a big hit may occur at almost the same timing. In this case, as described above, in order to execute a new jackpot running effect for the other pachinko machine 200A during the jackpot running effect for one pachinko machine 200A, the jackpot running effect display instruction signal is sent each time. You may make it transmit to the data display apparatus 400. FIG. Further, after the big hit running effect for one pachinko machine 200A is completed, a big hit running effect display instruction signal is transmitted to the data display device 400 with a certain time difference in order to execute a new big hit running effect for the other pachinko machine 200A. You may make it do. Further, in order to omit the big hit running effect for the other pachinko machine 200A, the big hit running effect display instruction signal may be transmitted only once.

  If it is determined that the display condition of the big hit running effect is not satisfied (A37; No), the processing unit 610 determines whether or not other simultaneous effect display conditions are satisfied (A41), and determines that it is satisfied. If so (A41; Yes), a display instruction signal for a simultaneous effect video corresponding to the established simultaneous effect display condition is transmitted to each data display device 400 (A43). Then, the processing unit 610 moves the process to A45. If it is determined that other simultaneous effect display conditions are not satisfied (P25; No), processing unit 610 moves the process to A49.

  After A39 or A43, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not it is a simultaneous production end timing (A45). If it is determined that it is the end timing (A45; Yes), the processing unit 610 transmits a simultaneous effect display end instruction signal to each data display device 400 (A47). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the simultaneous performance (A45; No), the processing unit 610 moves the process to A49.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 610 determines whether to end the processing (A49). For example, when the power to the hall computer 600 is turned off when the store is closed, it is determined that the process is to be ended. If it determines with continuing a process (A49; No), the process part 610 will return a process to A17. If it is determined that the process is to be terminated (A49; Yes), the management process is terminated.

[1-7-2. Data display device processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of main processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 according to the main program 491 stored in the storage unit 490.

  First, the processing unit 410 establishes communication with the hall computer 600 (B1). Then, the processing unit 410 requests the hall computer 600 to transmit the display setting data 691 and the tabulation setting data 693 of the data display device 400 (B3). The data display device 400 does not establish communication with the hall computer 600 and requests setting data, but the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600 are in a state in which communication is possible at all times, and the data display from the hall computer 600 is performed. The setting data may be automatically distributed to the device 400.

  Next, the processing unit 410 receives the display setting data 691 from the hall computer 600 via the second communication unit 480 and stores it in the storage unit 490 (B5). Further, the processing unit 410 receives the setting data for aggregation 693 from the hall computer 600 via the second communication unit 480 and stores it in the storage unit 490 (B7).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 410 performs an initial display setting process related to the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 based on the received display setting data 691 (B9). In the initial display setting process, the initial setting unit 411 initially sets display contents and display modes to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 based on the display setting data 691.

  Further, the processing unit 410 performs an initial aggregation setting process related to aggregation of game history information based on the received aggregation setting data 693 (B11). In the initial tabulation setting process, the initial setting unit 411 sets the model of the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400 based on the tabulation setting data 693, and the tabulation items to be tabulated as game history information and the tabulation Initialize the execution process to be executed for item aggregation.

  Next, the processing unit 410 starts the common total game history information totaling process according to the common total game history information totaling program 491b stored in the storage unit 490 (B13). In the common total game history information totaling process, the common total game history information totaling unit 414 was initially set in the initial totalization setting process of B11 based on the game signal output from the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400. The common general game history information corresponding to the total items is totaled.

  Specifically, when a probability changing signal and a time-shortening signal are received after receiving a big hit signal, it is determined that a probability changing big hit has occurred, and "1" is added to the number of probability changing big hits and updated. Further, when the time signal is received after the big hit signal is received, it is determined that the normal big hit has occurred, and “1” is added to the normal big hit number and updated. When a start signal is received, it is determined that a change has occurred, and the start count is incremented by 1 and updated. Then, when the big hit signal is received, the start count is reset. When counting the total number of starts, the start count is incremented by “1” based on the start signal regardless of whether or not a big hit signal is received, and the total start count is calculated as the total start count. As

  In addition, the processing unit 410 includes a specific total game history information totaling program corresponding to the execution process initially set in the initial totalization setting process of B11 among the plurality of specific total game history information totaling programs 491d stored in the storage unit 490. In accordance with 491d, the execution of the specific general game history information aggregation process is started (B15). In the specific total game history information totaling process, the specific total game history information totaling unit 415 is initially set in the initial totalization setting process of B11 based on the game signal output from the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400. The total general game history information corresponding to the total items is totaled.

  Specifically, for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 200A-1 of P1 to P20, after receiving a big hit signal in a normal state (low probability / low base state), It is determined that the vehicle has entered the ST state, and “1” is added to the number of times of entering the ST to update. Further, in the normal state, when the time-shortage signal is received after receiving the jackpot signal, it is determined that the time-shortage state has been entered, and “1” is added to the number of time-shortening times to be updated. Further, the ST entry rate is calculated by [ST entry number / (ST entry number + number of entry times)] × 100 based on the number of entry times of ST entry and the number of entry times.

  Also, for example, for the pachinko machine 200A-2 of P21 to P40, when a big hit signal is received, the round distribution (16 round probability variation big hit, 5 round probability variation based on the number of prize balls specified from the prize ball signal) Big hit) is determined. Then, the number of 16 rounds probable big hit consecutive villas and the number of five round probable big hits are updated based on the determined distribution of the current round and the previous round of distribution.

  The common total game history information totaling process and the specific total game history information totaling process are continuously executed until a predetermined execution end condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined execution end condition is satisfied, Execution is terminated. The predetermined execution end condition is, for example, that the business of the day has ended and that a predetermined time (for example, midnight, 12:00, 2 o'clock) has been reached, or that the total game history information has been counted by the store manager. Conditions such as that an operation has been made can be set. In response to the establishment of these predetermined execution end conditions, the processing unit 410 includes the common total game history information aggregated in the common total game history information aggregation process and the specific total game history information aggregated in the specific total game history information aggregation process. Are used to generate common total game history data and specific total game history data, and store these in the storage unit 490 as total game history data 497.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 410 starts a personal game history information totaling process (B17). And the process part 410 starts a display process according to the display program 491a memorize | stored in the memory | storage part 490 (B19). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the main process.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of personal game history information tabulation processing.
First, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the game start by the player is detected (C1). The game start can be detected by determining whether or not a predetermined game start operation (for example, pressing of a game start button not shown) has been performed on the operation unit 420. At this time, for example, when the player inputs a password set in advance, makes a password authentication request to the hall computer 6, and receives an authentication OK from the hall computer 6, the player starts the game. You may make it make it.

  When the data display device 400 and the inter-counter counting unit 500 are connected by communication and a card insertion signal indicating that a gaming card has been inserted is received from the inter-counter counting unit 500, the player starts playing. It may be made to detect the game start by a player by determining with.

  If it is determined that the game start is detected (C1; Yes), the processing unit 410 starts execution of the common personal game history information totaling process according to the common personal game history information totaling program 491c stored in the storage unit 490. (C3). In the common personal game history information totaling process, the common personal game history information totaling unit 416 is initially set in the initial totalization setting process of B11 based on the game signal output from the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400. The common personal game history information corresponding to the total items is totaled.

  Specifically, when a probability changing signal and a time-shortening signal are received after receiving the big hit signal, it is determined that the probability changing big hit has occurred, and “1” is added to the number of probability changing big hits and updated. Further, when the time signal is received after the big hit signal is received, it is determined that the normal big hit has occurred, and “1” is added to the normal big hit number and updated. Further, when a big hit signal is received while being controlled to a high probability state, it is determined that a long game has occurred, and “1” is added to the number of extended games and updated. If the current number of consecutive houses exceeds the maximum number of consecutive houses, the maximum number of consecutive houses is updated to the current number of consecutive houses.

  The processing unit 410 also includes a specific personal game history information totaling program corresponding to the execution process initially set in the initial totalization setting process of B11 among the plurality of specific personal game history information totaling programs 491e stored in the storage unit 490. In accordance with 491e, execution of the specific personal game history information totaling process is started (C5). In the specific individual game history information totaling process, the specific individual game history information totaling unit 417 is initialized in the initial totalization setting process of B11 based on the game signal output from the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the data display device 400. The individual personal game history information corresponding to the tabulation items is tabulated.

  Specifically, for example, for the pachinko machine 200A-1 of P1 to P20, when the probability variation signal and the time reduction signal are received, the remaining variation count of ST is determined based on the start signal, and the remaining variation count is 10 When a big hit signal is received within the rotation, it is determined that a pullback within the remaining 10 rotations of the ST has occurred, and “1” is added to the number of pullbacks within the remaining 10 rotations of the ST and updated. Further, when a big hit signal is received during the control of the time reduction state, it is determined that the time reduction return has occurred, and “1” is added to the number of time reduction returns and updated. In addition, the number of ST pullbacks and the number of times when ST pullback has not occurred are counted and stored, and [ST pullback number / (ST pullback number + number of ST pullbacks not generated)] × 100 Calculate the pullback rate.

  Further, for example, for the pachinko machine 200A-2 of P21 to P40, when a big hit signal is received, the round distribution based on the number of winning balls specified from the winning ball signal (16 rounds probable big hit, 5 rounds probable big hit ). Then, based on the determined distribution of the current round and the distribution of the previous round, the number of 16 rounds probable large hits is determined and updated. Further, when a big hit signal is received during the control of the time reduction state, it is determined that the time reduction return has occurred, and “1” is added to the number of time reduction returns and updated. In addition, if a signal during probability change is received after receiving a mid-range signal, but a signal during time reduction is not received, it is determined that a latent probability variation big hit has occurred, and “1” is added to the number of latent probability variation big hits. And update.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the game end by the player is detected (C7). The game end can be detected by determining whether or not a predetermined game end operation (for example, pressing of a game end button (not shown)) has been performed on the operation unit 420.

  When the data display device 400 and the inter-counter counting unit 500 are communicatively connected and a card discharge signal indicating that the gaming card has been discharged is received from the inter-counter counting unit 500, the player ends the game. By determining that the end of the game by the player may be detected.

  If it is determined that the game end has been detected (C7; Yes), the processing unit 410 ends the execution of the common personal game history information tabulation process being executed (C9). Further, the processing unit 410 ends the execution of the specific personal game history information tabulation process being executed (C11).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 410 uses the common individual game history information aggregated in the common individual game history information aggregation process and the specific individual game history information aggregated in the specific individual game history information aggregation process, Specific personal game history data is generated, and these data are stored in the storage unit 490 as personal game history data 498 (C13).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not a code display operation has been performed by the player (C15), and if it is determined that it has been performed (C15; Yes), the processing unit 410 executes a code generation process ( C17). In the code generation process, the code generation unit 419 generates a code obtained by encoding the personal game history data 498 stored in the storage unit 490 using a known encoding technique. The code generated here may be a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code.

  Thereafter, the first display control unit 412 controls display of the generated code on the first display unit 430 (C19). Then, the processing unit 410 outputs the personal game history data 498 to the hall computer 600 (C21), and then deletes the personal game history data 498 from the storage unit 490 (C23).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the process (C25). If it is determined that the process is to be continued (C25; No), the process returns to C1. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (C25; Yes), the process part 410 will complete | finish an individual game log | history information total process.

26 and 27 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of display processing.
First, the processing unit 410 starts executing screen selection switching display processing (E1). Specifically, control for selectively switching the display screen is performed in accordance with a display screen switching operation by the player. The display screen that can be selectively switched by the player in the screen selection switching display process is, among the various display screens described above, (1) general game history data screen, (2) individual game history data screen, (3) There are six types of display screens: a big hit history graph screen, (4) a payout graph screen, (5) a special image screen, and (6) a menu screen. When the screen switching icon displayed on the first display unit 430 is tapped, these display screens are switched in order.

  Here, when an operation for displaying a special image screen is performed by the player, the processing unit 410 stores the number of balls 496 in the storage unit 490 according to the special image display program 491f stored in the storage unit 480. A special image display process is executed for the latest number of possessed balls stored.

  Next, the processing unit 410 performs an operation determination process for determining whether or not the corresponding pachinko machine 200A is in an operating state (E3). Specifically, as described above, based on the gaming signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 200A and the card ejection signal transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 500, whether or not the pachinko machine 200A is currently in operation ( Or whether it is currently empty.

  If it is determined that it is operating (not an empty base) (E5; Yes), the processing unit 410 sets the operating flag to “ON” (E7). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in operation (is an empty base) (E5; No), the second display control unit 412 sets the operating flag to “OFF” (E9) and sets the empty base information to the first. Control is performed so as to display on the 2 display section 440 (E11).

  Note that whether or not the pachinko machine 200A is in operation, that is, whether or not the pachinko machine 200A is a vacant machine, is determined by a game signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 200A or a card ejection transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 500. In addition to the signal, for example, an image pickup device (camera) is provided in the pachinko machine 200A, the player's leaving due to imaging is determined, and a signal indicating that the player has left the pachinko machine 200A is transmitted. You may make it determine by doing. In addition, a detection sensor such as an infrared sensor may be provided to transmit a signal indicating that the player has left.

  After E7 or E11, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not a game is started on the pachinko machine 200A (E13). If it is determined that the game is started (E13; Yes), the processing unit 410 displays the game on the second display unit 440. Control is performed so as to hide the displayed vacant board information (E15). If it is determined that the game has not been started (E15; No), the processing unit 410 moves the process to E17.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the player is playing a game with the pachinko machine 200A (E17). If it is determined that the player is playing (E17; Yes), the game history information totaling process is performed. The display of the first display unit 430 is updated based on the totaled game history information, and it is determined whether the latent probability is changing or the time is short based on the game signal output from the pachinko machine 200A. The display on the second display unit 440 is updated based on the result (E19).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the possessed ball number signal is received from the inter-unit counting unit 500 (E21), and if it is determined that it has been received (R17; Yes), the received possessed ball number signal is displayed. Based on this, the possessed ball number data 496 in the storage unit 490 is updated (E23). If it determines with having not received the possession ball number signal (E21; No), the process part 410 will move a process to E25.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the menu screen is being displayed (E25). If it is determined that the menu screen is being displayed (E25; Yes), whether the player has performed a menu item selection operation. It is determined whether or not (E27). If it is determined that the selection operation has been performed (E27; Yes), menu item processing corresponding to the selected menu item is executed (E29).

  As described later, the menu items include, for example, display customization items for customizing a display screen that can be selected and displayed by the player, and volume / light amounts for adjusting the volume / light amount output from the data display device 400. A plurality of types of items such as an adjustment item and a plurality of types of items such as an event notification item for the player to view the event notification of the store are included. In the menu item processing, processing corresponding to the menu item selected by the player among these menu items is executed.

  Next, the first display control unit 411 determines whether or not a simultaneous effect display instruction signal has been received from the hall computer 600 (E31). If it is determined that it has been received (E31; Yes), execution of the big hit running effect is performed. It is determined whether or not an instruction has been given (E33).

  If it is determined that the execution instruction for the big hit running effect has been made (E33; Yes), the first display control unit 411 performs control for displaying the big hit running video on the first display unit 430 based on the display setting data 691. (E35). As described above, the display instruction signal for running effect output from the hall computer 600 is delayed by a delay time corresponding to a predetermined time difference. As a result, each data display device 400 causes the first display unit 430 to display the big hit running video with the time difference described above, and for players playing with the same kind of pachinko machine 200A, It becomes possible to make the big hit running image approach from the end data display device 400 in order, and it is possible to provide the player with a powerful effect and excite the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution instruction for the big hit running effect has not been made (E33; No), the first display control unit 411 displays the simultaneous effect image corresponding to the simultaneous effect display condition included in the simultaneous effect display instruction signal. Control to display on the 1 display unit 430 is performed (E37).

  Next, the first display control unit 411 determines whether or not to end the simultaneous effect display (E39). If it is determined not to end (E39; No), the first display control unit 411 waits as it is. Moreover, if it determines with complete | finishing (E39; Yes), control which complete | finishes the simultaneous effect display of the 1st display part 430 will be performed (E41). Then, the process moves to C.

  If it is determined at E31 that the simultaneous effect display instruction signal has not been received from the hall computer 600 (E31; No), the first display control unit 411 determines whether it is the display timing of the version information (E43). . The display timing of the version information may be a timing each time a predetermined time elapses, or may be a timing when it is detected that an operation for displaying the version information is performed on the first display unit 430 by a player or a player. . Moreover, the display of version information may be included in the simultaneous effect display, and the simultaneous effect display of the version information may be performed in synchronization with the simultaneous effect of the pachinko machine 200A.

  If it is determined that it is the display timing of the version information (E43; Yes), the first display control unit 411 displays the version information of the pachinko machine 200A provided corresponding to the data display device 400 as the first display unit 430. (E45). Here, the version information displayed on the first display unit 430 includes the model name of the pachinko machine 200A and the number of models (series), the normal jackpot probability, the probability variation jackpot probability, the probability variation rush rate, the continuation rate, etc. Information is included.

  Thereafter, the first display control unit 411 determines whether or not it is the display end timing of the version information (E47). If it is determined that it is not the display end timing (E47; No), it waits as it is. If it is determined that it is the display end timing (E47; Yes), the first display control unit 411 performs control to end the display of the version information on the first display unit 430 (E49).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the process (E51). If it is determined to continue the process (E51; No), the process returns to E3. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is to be terminated (E51; Yes), the display process is terminated.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of special image display processing.
This special image display process is a process of displaying a predetermined image corresponding to the number of possessed balls as the assigned game value. In this process, the display numbers of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are determined according to the two display counter values of the first display counter value and the second display counter value, and the first predetermined image is determined based on the display number. Control is performed to display the image and the second predetermined image. In this process, “first” is added to the head of the coefficient (parameter value) used for display control and non-display control of the first predetermined image, and the coefficient (parameter value) used for display control and non-display control of the second predetermined image. ) Is preceded by “second”. The first display counter value is a counter value indicating the display number of the first predetermined image, and the second display counter value is a counter value indicating the display number of the second predetermined image. In the following description, it is assumed that the first display counter value and the second display counter value are initially set to 0.

  First, the special image display processing unit 418 calculates an integer part of the second integer m = [number of possessed balls / second display threshold value] (D1). The second integer m is a coefficient used for setting the second display counter value.

  Next, the special image display processing unit 418 calculates the number of possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) (D3). The number of intermediate possessed balls is a coefficient used for setting the first display counter value and the second display counter value.

  Next, the special image display processing unit 418 determines whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls has reached the second non-display threshold (D5). This condition is satisfied when the number of intermediate possessed balls is the same as the second non-display threshold or exceeds the second non-display threshold.

  If it is determined in D5 that the condition is satisfied (D5; Yes), the special image display processing unit 418 determines whether or not the second display counter value is larger than m (D7). If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (D7; Yes), the special image display processing unit 418 sets m + 1 as the second display counter value (D9). This means that the latest second display counter value is maintained. Then, the special image display processing unit 418 sets the first display counter value to 0 (D11), and then proceeds to D25.

  When it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in D5 (D5; No), or when it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in D7 (D7; No), the special image display processing unit 418 sets m to the second display counter value. Set (D13). Then, the special image display processing unit 418 calculates an integer part of the first integer n = [number of intermediate possessed balls / first display threshold value] (D15). The first integer n is a coefficient used for setting the first display counter value.

  Next, the special image display processing unit 418 determines whether or not the intermediate number of possessed balls− (n × first display threshold) has reached the first non-display threshold (D17). This condition is satisfied when the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold) is the same as the first non-display threshold or exceeds the first non-display threshold. If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (D17; Yes), the special image display processing unit 418 determines whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n (D21).

  If it is determined in D21 that the condition is satisfied (D21; Yes), the special image display processing unit 418 sets n + 1 as the first display counter value (D23). This means that the latest first display counter value is maintained. Then, the special image display processing unit 418 shifts the processing to D25.

  When it is determined that the condition of D17 is not satisfied (D17; No), or when it is determined that the condition of D21 is not satisfied (D21; No), the special image display processing unit 418 sets n to the first display counter value. Set (D19).

  Next, the special image display processing unit 418 performs control to display the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 according to the first display counter value (D25). Specifically, the same number of first predetermined images as the first display counter value are displayed on the first display unit 430.

  Further, the special image display processing unit 418 performs control to display the second predetermined image on the first display unit 430 according to the second display counter value (D27). Specifically, the same number of second predetermined images as the second display counter value are displayed on the first display unit 430. Then, the special image display processing unit 418 ends the special image display process.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram of the principle of special image display in the special image display processing described above. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots, the first non-display threshold is 800 shots, and a dollar box is displayed on the first display unit 430 as a first predetermined image will be described as an example.

  In the special image display processing described above, the first display threshold value of 1000 shots is set as one display unit number, and every time the number of possessed balls reaches this display unit number (1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots,...) Increase the display of the dollar box by one. Further, the first non-display threshold value of 800 shots is set as one non-display unit number, and every time the predetermined number of balls falls below the non-display unit number (800 shots, 1800 shots, 2800 shots,. Decrease the display of by 1.

  In this figure, the leftmost figure shows the case where the number of possessed balls is 1800. Since the number of possessed balls exceeds the display unit number of 1000, one dollar box is displayed. Yes. After that, the number of possessed balls increased and the number of possessed balls was 1900. However, since the number of possessed balls has not yet exceeded the display unit number of 2000, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. Thereafter, when the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, the dollar box is increased by one and displayed.

  Thereafter, the number of possessed balls increased to 2100, but since the number of possessed balls does not exceed the display unit number of 3000, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. Then, it is assumed that the number of possessed balls is reduced by the player paying out the game balls, and the number of possessed balls is reduced to 1900. In this case, the number of possession balls is less than 2000 which is the number of display units, but since it is not less than 1800 which is the number of non-display units, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged.

  It should be noted that the number of dollar boxes to be displayed differs between the case where the number of possessed balls increases from 1800 to 1900 and the number of possessed balls decreases from 2100 to 1900. Is a point. This means that even if the number of possessed balls is the same, the number of dollar boxes to be displayed may differ depending on whether the number of possessed balls changes in the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. The details will be described later with a specific example.

  After that, the number of possessed balls decreased to 1800 possessed balls. However, since the number of possessed balls is not less than 1800 which is the number of hidden units, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. When the number of possessed balls decreases and falls below 1800, which is the number of hidden units, one dollar box is reduced and one is displayed.

  Next, the details of the special image display process of FIG. 28 will be described by giving a plurality of specific examples when the number of possessed balls is different. In the following description, the process in each step will be described with reference to each step of the special image display process.

(1) Specific example 1
First, consider a case where the number of possessed balls = 1900.
In D1, the second integer m = [the number of possessed balls / the integer part of the second display threshold] = the integer part of [1900/5000] = 0 is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) = 1900− (0 × 5000) = 1900 shots is calculated.
In D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 1900 has reached 4600, which is the second non-display threshold value. Since this determination result is a negative determination, the process proceeds to D13.

In D13, since m = 0, 0 is set to the second display counter value.
In D15, the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possession balls / the first display threshold value] = the integer part = 1 [1900/1000] of the integer part = 1 is calculated.

  In D17, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold) = 1900− (1 × 1000) = 900 has reached 800, which is the first non-display threshold, and this determination result Since affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to D21.

  In D21, it is determined whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n. Here, since the first display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 1900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000, the determination result of D21 is different. come.

  When the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, the first display counter value = 1 when the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, so the value is the same as n = 1. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is negative, and the process proceeds to D19. In D19, n (= 1) is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 1 and the second display counter value = 0 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 1, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 0. .

  On the other hand, when the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000, the first display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, and is larger than n = 1. Become. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D23. In D23, n + 1 (= 1 + 1 = 2) is set as the first display counter value. That is, the first display counter value is maintained. As a result, since the first display counter value = 2 and the second display counter value = 0 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 2, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 0. .

  From the above example, even if the number of possessed balls is the same 1900, it is displayed when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900 and when the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000 It can be seen that the number of first predetermined images differs.

(2) Specific example 2
Next, consider a case where the number of possessed balls = 7900.
In D1, the second integer m = [the number of possessed balls / the integer part of the second display threshold] = the integer part = 1 of [7900/5000] is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) = 7900− (1 × 5000) = 2900 is calculated.
In D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 2900 has reached 4600 which is the second non-display threshold value. Since this determination result is a negative determination, the process proceeds to D13.

Since D13 is m = 1, 1 is set to the second display counter value.
At D15, the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possessed balls / the first display threshold value] = the integer part = [2900/1000]. The integer part = 2 is calculated.

  In D17, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold) = 2900− (2 × 1000) = 900 has reached 800, which is the first non-display threshold, and the determination result Since affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to D21.

  In D21, it is determined whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n. Here, since the first display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 7900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 7900 after reaching 8000, the determination result of D21 is different. come.

  When the number of possessed balls increases to 7900, the first display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 7000, so the value is the same as n = 2. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is negative, and the process proceeds to D19. In D19, n (= 2) is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 2 and the second display counter value = 1 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 2, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 1. .

  On the other hand, when the number of possessed balls decreases to 7900 after reaching 8000, the first display counter value = 3 when the number of possessed balls reaches 8000, and thus becomes larger than n = 2. . For this reason, the determination result of D21 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D23. In D23, n + 1 (= 2 + 1 = 3) is set as the first display counter value. That is, the first display counter value is maintained. As a result, since the first display counter value = 3 and the second display counter value = 1 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 3, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 1. .

(3) Specific example 3
Next, consider a case where the number of possessed balls = 9900.
In D1, the second integer m = [the number of possessed balls / the second display threshold value] = the integer part = [9900/5000]. The integer part = 1 is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) = 9900 shots− (1 × 5000) = 4900 shots is calculated.
At D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 4900 has reached 4600, which is the second non-display threshold value. Since this determination result is affirmative, the process moves to D7.

  In D7, it is determined whether or not the second display counter value is larger than m. Here, since the second display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 9900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 9900 after reaching 10,000, the determination result of D7 differs. come.

  When the number of possessed balls increases to 9900, the second display counter value = 1 when the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, so the same value as m = 1. For this reason, the determination result of D7 is negative, and the process is transferred to D13. In D13, m (= 1) is set as the second display counter value.

  On the other hand, when the number of possessed balls decreases to 9900 after reaching 10,000, the second display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, and is larger than m = 1. Become. For this reason, the determination result of D7 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D9. At D9, m + 1 (= 1 + 1 = 2) is set as the second display counter value. That is, the second display counter value is maintained. In D11, 0 is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 0 and the second display counter value = 2 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 0, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 2. .

  As described above, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases, the player keeps the counting lever 341 in a state where the game ball is discharged from the pachinko machine 200A to the counting passage 343 at any time. The game ball discharged from the pachinko machine 200A without the counting lever 341 being accumulated in the lower plate 24 is stored in the lower plate 24, and the game ball is accumulated to some extent. There are two cases: when the counting lever 341 is pulled in the accumulated stage, the accumulated game balls flow into the counting passage 343 at a time and counted, thereby increasing at once.

  Particularly problematic is the latter case (when the number of possessed balls increases at a stretch). As described above, since the data display device 400 receives the possession ball number signal from the card unit 300 at intermittent timing, the possession ball number specified from the possession ball number signal received at one timing and the next timing There may be a large difference in the number of possession balls specified from the possession ball number signal received at. Specifically, by storing the game balls that the player wins during the big hit until the lower plate 24 is full, a large number of game balls are counted at once, and the number of possessed balls is, for example, 1000 There is a case where it increases at a time in a numerical range of from 2,000 to 2,000. In this case, since the first display threshold is 1000 shots, there may be a case where the number of possessed balls increases across two or three first display thresholds at a time.

  Assuming such a case, in the special image display process described above, two integers of the first integer n and the second integer m are calculated, and the first display counter value and the second display counter value are calculated using these integers. To set. Thereby, it is possible to always display a correct number of predetermined images regardless of the degree of increase in the number of possessed balls (degree of increase).

  The display counter values (first display counter and second display counter value) are coefficients for specifying the display stage of the predetermined image (first predetermined image and second predetermined image), and the display stage is increased by one stage. It is a counter value that increases by 1 every time. Instead of storing such a display counter value, a display flag having a certain number of possessed balls as a reference number of game media may be set, and a predetermined image may be displayed based on the display flag.

  Specifically, a value obtained by adding the first non-display threshold value to an integer multiple of the first display threshold value can be used as the reference game medium number, and a display flag for the reference game medium number can be set. For example, if the first display threshold is 1000 and the first non-display threshold is 800, 800, 1800, 2800,... Set the flag. Specifically, “1” is set to the display flag every time the number of possessed balls increases and reaches an integral multiple of the first display threshold. Further, every time the number of possessed balls increases to reach the reference number of game media or the number of possessed balls decreases and falls below the reference number of game media, “0” is set in the display flag. And based on this display flag and the number of possession balls, the display number of a predetermined image is determined.

  A case where the reference number of game media is 1800 is described. As described above, for example, when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, the display number of the first predetermined image is 1, and after the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, it decreases to 1900. In this case, the display number of the first predetermined image needs to be two. Therefore, when the number of possessed balls increases and reaches 1800, the display flag is set to “0”, and when the number of possessed balls increases to reach 2000, the display flag is set to “1”. In this case, even if the number of possessed balls decreases from 2000, the display flag remains set to “1” unless it falls below the standard number of game media of 1800. In other words, when the number of possessed balls is increased to 1900 and the display flag is set to “0”, the number of possessed balls reaches 2000 and then decreases to 1900. Means that the display flag is set to “1”. Therefore, based on the fact that the number of possession balls is one thousand, the display number of the first predetermined image is determined as 1 in the former case, and the display number of the first predetermined image is determined as 2 in the latter case. can do.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special image screen displayed on the first display unit 430. This figure shows how the display of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image changes according to the number of balls possessed by the player. Here, a case where a dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as the second predetermined image is illustrated. Further, the description will be made assuming that the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 5000 shots.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one dollar box is displayed (dollar box first display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, two dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box second display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000, three dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box third display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, four dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box 4th Display stage).

When the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the number of dollar boxes displayed will be 5, but since the display conditions for special boxes are met, all dollar boxes will be hidden and one special box will be displayed. (Special box first display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 6000, the number of possessed balls has increased by 1000 on the basis of 5000, so one dollar box is displayed and one special box is displayed (dollar box first display stage & special box First display stage).
Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9,000, four dollar boxes and one special box are displayed (dollar box fourth display stage & special box first display stage).

When the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, the number of dollar boxes displayed will be 5. However, since the special box display conditions are met, all dollar boxes will be hidden and one extra box will be added. Then, two special boxes are displayed (special box second display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, the number of possessed balls has increased by 1000 based on 10000, so one dollar box is displayed and two special boxes are displayed (dollar box first display stage & special Box second display stage).
The same applies to the following. For example, when the number of possessed balls reaches 15000, three special boxes are displayed (special box third display stage).

  In this display screen example, the display of the dollar box (first predetermined image) is increased by one for every 1000 balls possessed, but when the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the dollar box (first predetermined image) The special box (second predetermined image) is newly displayed with the display of (image) hidden.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the displayed dollar box (first predetermined image) is not hidden, and the dollar box (first predetermined image) is continuously displayed. A box (second predetermined image) may be newly displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating another example of the special image screen displayed on the first display unit 430. Here, the case where the ball bulk of the game balls loaded in the thousand-throw box as the first predetermined image is displayed and the ten thousand boxes as the second predetermined image is displayed. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 10,000 shots is illustrated.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one game ball is displayed on the thousand car boxes (first car ball display stage of the thousand car boxes). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, two stages of game balls are displayed in the thousand car boxes (the second car ball display stage of the thousand car boxes). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000, 3 stages of game balls are displayed in the thousand car boxes (3rd ball display stage of 1000 car boxes), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, 4 stages of game balls are displayed in the thousand car boxes. (Thousands box fourth ball volume display stage).

  Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9,000, nine stages of game balls are displayed in the thousand-thousand boxes (the nine-thousand box ninth-bulk display stage). And when the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, the ball capacity of the thousand car boxes will be 10 tiers, but since no more game balls can be stacked in the thousand car boxes, all the ball capacity of the thousand car boxes will be cleared, One box is displayed (the first display stage of both boxes).

  After that, when the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, one game ball is displayed in the thousand boxes, and one box is displayed (one thousand boxes first ball volume display stage & both boxes first display stage). In the same manner, when the number of possessed balls reaches 19000, 9 balls are displayed in the thousand boxes, and one box is displayed (the thousand boxes 9th ball volume display stage & both boxes first display stage) ). And when the number of possessed balls reaches 20,000, the ball capacity of the thousand car boxes will be 10 tiers, but since no more game balls can be stacked in the thousand car boxes, all the ball capacity of the thousand car boxes will be cleared, One box is added, and two boxes are displayed (second box for both boxes).

  In this display screen example, the display of the ball capacity (first predetermined image) of a thousand boxes is increased by one for every 1000 balls held. When the increase in the number of balls held reaches 10,000 balls, the ball volume of the thousand boxes is increased. The (first predetermined image) is not displayed, and both boxes (second predetermined image) are newly displayed.

  In addition, when the increment of the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000 shots, the displayed ball capacity (first predetermined image) of the thousand boxes is not hidden, and the display of the ball capacity (first predetermined image) of the thousand boxes is continued. In this case, a new box (second predetermined image) may be displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating another example of the special image screen displayed on the first display unit 430. Here, the case where the ball bulk of the game balls stacked in one ball box as the first predetermined image is displayed and the ball bulk of the game balls stacked in another ball box as the second predetermined image is illustrated. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 10,000 shots is illustrated.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one stage of game balls is displayed in the first box (first ball volume display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, two game balls are displayed in the first box (second ball volume display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000, 3 game balls are displayed in the first box (third ball volume display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, the game is displayed in the first box. Four balls are displayed (fourth ball volume display step).

  Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9000, 9 game balls are displayed in the first box (9th ball bulk display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, ten stages of game balls are displayed in the first box. At this time, since no more game balls can be stacked in the first box, the second box is displayed (tenth ball display stage).

  The same applies to the following, and when the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, one game ball is displayed in the second box (the eleventh ball volume display step). When the number of possessed balls reaches 20000, 10 game balls are displayed in the second box. At this time, since no more game balls can be stacked in the second box, the third box is displayed (the 20th ball bulk display stage).

  In this display screen example, the display of the ball bulk (first predetermined image) of the ball box is incremented by 1 for every 1000 balls possessed, and when the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, The display of the ball volume (first predetermined image) of the stacked ball box is left as it is (continue), and the ball volume (second predetermined image) of the next ball box is newly displayed.

  In addition, when the increase in the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000 shots, the display of the ball bulk (first predetermined image) of the ball box stacked first is not continued, and the ball bulk ( The first predetermined image) may be hidden and the ball volume (second predetermined image) of the next ball box may be newly displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

[1-7-3. Inter-counter counting unit processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the inter-unit counting unit processing executed by the processing unit 510 of the inter-unit counting unit 500 in accordance with the inter-unit counting unit processing program 521 stored in the ROM 520.

  First, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not a possession card has been inserted by the player (F1). If it is determined that the possession card has been inserted (F1; Yes), the card of the possession card from the card R / W 570 is determined. Information is acquired (F3). Then, the number of possessed balls included in the acquired card information is stored in the RAM 530 as possessed ball number data 531 (F5). If it is determined that the holding card has not been inserted (F1; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to F7.

  Next, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not the ticketing button 551 is pressed by the player (F7). If it is determined that the player has pressed the ticketing button 551 (F7; Yes), the coin card issuing process for issuing the coin card is issued. (F9). Specifically, control is performed such that card information 533 in which the number of possessed balls indicated by the possessed ball number data 531 stored in the RAM 530 is associated is written in the retained ball card R / W 570, Control is performed to cause the holding card insertion / discharge section 565 to discharge the holding card. If it is determined that the ticketing button 551 has not been pressed (F7; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to F11.

  Next, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not the payout button 552 has been pressed by the player (F11). If it is determined that the player has pressed the button (F11; Yes), a ball payout process is performed (F13). Specifically, control is performed so that the counting-out unit 380 causes the player to pay out a predetermined number (125 shots) of game balls. Then, the processing unit 510 updates the possessed ball number data 531 in the RAM 530 (F15).

  Next, the processing unit 510 controls to send the ball lending signal to the data display device 400 (F16). The ball lending signal is a signal that is continuously transmitted until the game ball lending (refund) is completed. If it is determined that the payout button 552 has not been pressed (F11; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to F17.

  Next, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not the counting result is input from the counting payout unit 380 (F17), and if it is determined that it has been input (F17; Yes), the possessed ball number data 531 in the RAM 530 is updated. (F19).

  Then, the processing unit 510 controls to transmit the counting signal to the data display device 400 (F20). The counting signal is a signal that is continuously transmitted until the counting of the number of possessed balls is completed. If it is determined that the count result has not been input (F17; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to F21.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 510 determines whether it is the output timing of the possessed ball number signal (F21). And if it determines with it being an output timing (F21; Yes), it will control to output the possession ball number signal to the data display apparatus 400 (F23). If it is determined that it is not the possession ball number signal output timing (F21; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to F25.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not to end the processing (F25). If it determines with continuing a process (F25; No), the process part 510 will return a process to F1. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (F25; Yes), the process part 510 will complete | finish a unit counting unit process.

[1-7-4. Cell phone processing]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of mobile terminal processing executed by the mobile phone 16A.
The processing unit of the mobile phone 16A determines whether or not the player has performed an operation of reading the code displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400 (S1). If it is determined that the operation has been performed (S1; Yes), control is performed so that the code reader included in the mobile phone 16A reads the code (S3). Then, the processing unit 410 decodes the personal game history data from the read code and stores it in the storage unit of the mobile phone 16A (S5).

  Next, the processing unit of the mobile phone 16A determines whether or not a game history display application activation operation has been performed (S7). If it is determined that it has been performed (S7; Yes), a plurality of data stored and stored in the storage unit are stored. Notification processing for instructing the player to select personal game history data to be displayed as personal game history information from among the individual game history data (S9). The game history display application can be downloaded and acquired in advance by a player who has the mobile phone 16A from a distribution device that distributes various applications.

  Next, the processing unit of the mobile phone 16A determines the personal game history data selected by the player (S11), and the mobile display for displaying the personal game history information included in the determined personal game history data in a specific manner. Business data is generated (S13). Then, the processing unit of the mobile phone 16A uses the generated mobile display data to display the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information on the display unit of the mobile phone 16A in a specific manner (S15).

  The mobile display data includes common personal game history display data for displaying a common personal game history and specific personal game history display data for displaying a specific personal game history. The common personal game history display data is data that displays, for example, the total value of each total item included in the common personal game history information together with the name of the pachinko machine 200A that the player has played. The specific personal game history display data includes, for example, for each model of the pachinko machine 200A played by the player, the model name or manufacturer name of the pachinko machine 200A of the model, and the characters appearing in the pachinko machine 200A of the model. This is data for displaying the total value of each total item included in the specific game history information in the model together with the image.

  The common personal game history display data and the specific personal game history display data can be distributed to the mobile phone 16A as one packaged data, and the mobile phone 16A uses the packaged mobile display data as the packaged data. The game history display application is used to develop and display it on the display unit, thereby enabling the player to view the common personal game history and the specific personal game history.

  Further, the above game history display application is configured so that the player can select the model of the pachinko machine 200 that has played in the past, and when the model is selected by the player, it is accumulated in the storage unit. By developing and displaying data for display corresponding to the stored model, it is possible to browse past specific game history information for each model.

  The common personal game history display data and the specific personal game history display data are not distributed as one packaged data to the mobile phone 16A, but are displayed as common personal game history display data and specific personal game history display data. The data may be distributed to the mobile phone 16A as individual data.

  Next, the processing unit of the mobile phone 16A determines whether or not an end operation of the game history display application has been performed (S17). If it is determined that the end operation has not been performed (S17; No), the process returns to S9. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the end operation has been performed (S17; Yes), the processing unit of the mobile phone 16A ends the execution of the game history display application being executed (S19).

  Next, the processing unit of the mobile phone 16A determines whether or not to end the process (S21). If it is determined to continue the process (S21; No), the process returns to S1. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (S21; Yes), the process part of 16 A of mobile telephones will complete | finish a portable terminal process.

[1-8. Display screen]
[1-8-1. Display screen of first display unit]
35 to 38 are diagrams showing examples of display screens displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400. FIG.

FIG. 35 (1) is a diagram showing an example of the total game history data screen.
This general game history data screen is a display screen displayed on the first display unit 430 as an initial setting (default), and the model of the pachinko machine 200A provided corresponding to the data display device 400 at the top of the screen. The name (here, “Pachinko XXX”) is displayed.

  In addition, on the total game history data screen, as the common total game history information, “big hit number”, “probability big hit number”, “normal big hit number”, and “start number” are individually arranged. It is displayed in the individual frame for synthesis. As shown in FIG. 9, the arrangement positions of these individual individual frames are initially set as the first initial setting positions.

  In addition, in the lower part of the center of the general game history data screen, the specific total game history information is collectively displayed in the general special frame to which the double frame is applied as the frame type. More specifically, the unique title for the game is displayed as “total game history” at the top of the special frame for general use. “Number of rushes” and “ST rush rate” are displayed. As shown in FIG. 9, the arrangement position of the general peculiar frame is initially set as the second initial setting position.

  In addition, a call icon, a service icon, a screen switching icon, and a menu icon are displayed at the bottom of the screen. By tapping the call icon, the player can call the store clerk. By tapping the service icon, the player can make various service selections. By tapping the screen switching icon, the player can switch the display of the plurality of types of display screens described above. Further, by tapping the menu icon, the player can display the menu screen.

FIG. 35 (2) shows an example of the personal game history data screen.
This personal game history data screen is a screen that is displayed when a player performs a game start operation and then taps a screen switching icon. The personal game history data screen is provided at the top of the screen in correspondence with the data display device 400. The model name of the pachinko machine 200A (here, “Pachinko XXX”) is displayed.

  In addition, on the personal game history data screen, as the common personal game history information, “number of big hits”, “number of probable big hits”, “normal number of big hits”, and “maximum number of consecutive games” are individually arranged. Is displayed in the individual frame for personal use. The arrangement positions of these individual personal frames are initially set as third initial setting positions as shown in FIG.

  In addition, in the right center portion of the personal game history data screen, specific personal game history information is collectively displayed in a personal specific frame to which a double frame is applied as a frame type. More specifically, “Individual game history” is displayed as the display title in the upper part of the individual-specific frame, and below that, “the number of withdrawals within the remaining 10 rotations of ST” as the individual game history information. “Time pullback number of times” and “ST pullback rate” are displayed. As shown in FIG. 9, the arrangement position of the personal unique frame is initially set as the fourth initial setting position.

  In this personal game history data screen, a display setting for displaying the number of balls possessed by the player (the number of local counting balls, the number of stored balls, the number of balls) as an initial setting (default) is performed, and the personal game history information is displayed. These may be displayed together.

FIG. 35 (3) is a diagram showing a state in which a code in which the personal game history data is encoded is displayed on the personal game history data screen.
When the player finishes the game and performs the code display operation, the “Two-dimensional” is displayed together with the unique title of the individual game in the personal frame for displaying the individual game history information. Please read the code "message and a two-dimensional code. The player operates the mobile phone 16A to read the two-dimensional code, thereby acquiring personal game history information (common personal game history information and unique personal game history information) from the start to the end of his game. be able to.

FIG. 36A is a diagram illustrating an example of a menu screen.
In this menu screen, as menu items, a display customization icon for the player to customize display, a volume / light quantity adjustment icon for the player to adjust the volume / light quantity, and the player browses the event notification. An event notification icon is displayed.

FIG. 36B is a diagram illustrating an example of the display customization screen.
This display customization screen is a screen that is displayed when the display customization icon is tapped on the menu screen of FIG. 36 (1), and is displayed together with the message “Please select a screen to customize display”. 5 icons corresponding to the display screen for performing "General Game History Data Screen", "Individual Game History Data Screen", "Big Hit History Graph Screen", "Outlet Graph Screen" and "Special Image Screen" are displayed. Yes. The player can perform display customization for the display screen by tapping the icon of the display screen for which display customization is desired from among these icons.

FIG. 36 (3) is a diagram showing an example of the display customization screen.
This display customization screen is a display screen that is displayed when the personal game history data screen is selected in the display customization screen of FIG. 36 (2), and “Please select the type of personal game history to be customized. ”And two icons“ common personal game history ”and“ specific personal game history ”corresponding to the personal game history for which display customization is performed are displayed. The player can customize the display of the display of the personal game history by tapping the icon of the personal game history to be customized from among these icons.

  In the display customization described above, the processing unit 410 uses the display mode setting data corresponding to its own device included in the display setting data 691 stored in the storage unit 490 according to the player's operation, and displays a corresponding display screen. And display customization processing for changing the display mode of the specific game history information. The display modes that can be changed by the display customization process are as shown in the first display section display mode setting table 683a of FIG. 9 and the specific game history display mode setting table 6831 of FIG.

  When performing display customization, the display mode before the change by the customization operation and the display mode after the change by the customization operation are displayed side by side so that they can be compared. When a confirmation OK operation is performed, it is preferable to display the specific game history in the display mode after the change.

FIG. 37 (1) is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit history graph screen.
In the jackpot history graph screen, a jackpot history graph indicating the number of jackpot occurrences for the past 30 days is displayed in the center of the screen, with the horizontal axis representing the date and the vertical axis representing the number of jackpots. This jackpot history graph is a jackpot history graph with no distinction based on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot and probability variation jackpot). In this jackpot history graph, a white rectangle indicates the occurrence of one jackpot.

FIG. 37 (2) is a diagram illustrating an example of the payout graph screen.
On the outgoing ball graph screen, a outgoing graph in which the outgoing balls in the corresponding pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the day are graphed in time series is displayed. In the outgoing ball graph, the horizontal axis is time (or the number of starts), and the vertical axis is outgoing ball. In the lower part of the screen, a call icon, a service icon, a screen switching icon, and a menu icon are displayed.

FIG. 37 (3) is a diagram illustrating an example of the special image screen.
On the special image screen, a dollar box image as an example of a first predetermined image and a special box image as an example of a second predetermined image are displayed. The display numbers of the dollar box image and the special box image are updated according to the number of balls possessed by the player in the special image display update process described above. With this display screen, the player can grasp the number of possessed balls by an image of a dollar box or a special box.

  It should be noted that display settings for displaying the number of balls possessed by the player as a default may be performed on the special image screen, and the number of possessed balls may be displayed together with the special image. Further, information on the prepaid balance and the card balance owned by the player may be acquired from the inter-counter counting unit 5 and these information may be displayed together.

  In addition, two icons of a first display switching icon (display switching 1) and a second display switching icon (display switching 2) are displayed on the right part of the special image screen. By tapping the display switching icon, the display of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image displayed on the special image screen is switched. More specifically, when the first display switching icon is tapped, the first predetermined image is a thousand box image and a pachinko ball image stacked on the thousand box image, and the second predetermined image is a special box image. The display screen is switched to the image screen (see FIG. 31). When the second display switching icon is tapped, the first predetermined image is a pachinko ball image stacked in one box, and the second predetermined image is a pachinko ball image stacked in another box. The display screen is switched to the special image screen (see FIG. 32).

  As described above, this embodiment is characterized in that the number of balls possessed by the player is displayed in an intuitively easy-to-understand manner using a combination of different predetermined images (first predetermined image and second predetermined image). Another feature is that the display can be switched to a special image screen with a different combination of predetermined images by tapping a display switching icon.

[1-8-2. Display screen of second display section]
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 38 (1) is a diagram showing an example of an empty table information screen.
On this empty board information screen, empty board information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is an empty board is displayed. Specifically, a message “Available now” is displayed along with a message “vacant” in the center of the screen. By this message, the player can know that the pachinko machine 200A is currently empty and can be played.

FIG. 38B is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit middle screen.
The jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is jackpot is displayed on the jackpot screen. Specifically, a flame is displayed at the center of the screen, and a “big hit” message indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is in big hit is displayed. By this message, the player can know that the pachinko machine 200A is currently a big hit.

FIG. 38 (3) is a diagram showing an example of the latent probability changing screen.
On this latent probability changing screen, latent probability changing information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is changing the latent probability is displayed at the center of the screen. Specifically, a jagged balloon is displayed at the center of the screen, and a message “latency probability changing” is displayed therein. In addition, a message “Now is a chance !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  Since the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the player's game position, the player cannot know that the latent probability is being changed. On the other hand, the player can know that the pachinko machine 200A is undergoing latent probability change by looking at the second display unit 440. That is, the viewing player knows that the stand is in a chance state, but the player continues playing without knowing that the stand is in a chance state. Also, if a player leaves the game without knowing that the latent probability is changing, the surrounding players know that the stand is in a chance state, so they sit on the stand and play the game. You can expect a big hit by doing it. As a result, a new interest that cannot be realized by the conventional call lamp device can be created.

FIG. 38 (4) is a diagram showing an example of a time-short / medium screen.
In this time-short screen, time-time information indicating that the pachinko machine 200A is in the time-short state is displayed at the center of the screen. Specifically, a cloud-like balloon is displayed at the center of the screen, and a “short time” message is displayed therein. At the bottom of the screen, a message saying “Sorry.

  Since the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the player's game position, the player cannot know that the time is short. On the other hand, the watching game player can know that the pachinko machine 200A is short in time and has a low possibility of making a big hit by looking at the second display unit 440.

[1-9. Effect]
The first gaming system 1A is provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 200A, and is a data display device 400 that is a type of information display device that can display a game history, and a portable phone that is a type of player terminal possessed by the player. Phone 16A. The data display device 400 performs setting according to the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200A, and is a personal game history from the start to the end of the game by the player on the corresponding pachinko machine 200A. Specific information that can specify the common individual game history and the specific individual game history that varies depending on the setting is output. The mobile phone 16A displays the common individual game history and the specific individual game history specified from the specific information output from the data display device 400 on the display unit.
According to this, the player can acquire the common personal game history and the specific personal game history from the data display device 400 with the mobile phone 16A possessed by the player, and display them on the display unit of the mobile phone 16A. Thus, the player can view the personal game history corresponding to the type of the pachinko machine 200A.

In addition, the data display device 400 performs setting according to the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200A, and the first display unit 430 is used as game history information in the pachinko machine 200A as a common common game history regardless of the setting. The common general game history and the common individual game history are displayed, and the specific general game history and the specific individual game history are displayed as different specific game histories depending on the setting. At this time, the first display unit 430 displays the specific game history in a display mode that can specify that the player is the specific game history.
According to this, since it becomes possible for the player to check the game history corresponding to the type of gaming machine, not only can the player's willingness to play be improved, but also the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved. be able to.

[1-10. Modified example]
[1-10-1. Special image display processing]
The special image display process described in the above embodiment is not limited to the process described above. Hereinafter, a modified example of the special image display process will be described.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of a second special image display process executed by the special image display processing unit 418 instead of the special image display process described above.

  The processing unit 310 calculates the number of first unit balls = the number of possessed balls− (first display counter value × first display threshold) (G1). The processing unit 310 calculates the second unit ball number = the number of possessed balls− (second display counter value × second unit ball number) (G3). Here, the number of first unit balls is the number of possessed balls normalized to a numerical range of 0 to 1000 shots in order to enable threshold determination using the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value. The second unit ball count is the number of possessed balls normalized to a numerical range of 0 to 5000 shots in order to enable threshold determination using the second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value.

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the first unit ball number has reached the first display threshold value (G5), and if it is determined that it has reached (G5; Yes), the first display counter value is set to 1. Are added (G7). Then, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the second unit ball count has reached the second display threshold value (G9). If it is determined that it has reached (G9; Yes), the processing unit 310 responds to the second display counter value. Control is performed to display the second predetermined images on the first display unit 430 (G11).

  Next, the processing unit 310 performs control to erase all display of the first predetermined image (G13). Then, the processing unit 310 adds 1 to the second display counter value (G15), resets the first display counter value (G17), and ends the second special image display process.

  If it is determined in G9 that the second unit ball count has not reached the second display threshold value (G9; No), the processing unit 310 performs the first display of the number of first predetermined images corresponding to the first display counter value. Control is performed so as to display on the unit 430 (G19). Then, the second special image display process ends.

  If it is determined in G5 that the first unit ball count has not reached the first display threshold value (G5; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the first unit ball count has fallen below the first non-display threshold value. (G21).

  If it is determined that the first number of unit balls is below the first non-display threshold (G21; Yes), the processing unit 310 determines whether the first display counter value is 0 (G23). If it is determined that there is not (G23; No), 1 is subtracted from the first display counter value (G25). Then, control is performed to display the first predetermined number of images corresponding to the first display counter value on the first display unit 430 (G27).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the second unit ball count has fallen below the second non-display threshold (G29). If it is determined that the value is lower (G29; Yes), it is determined whether the second display counter value is 0 (G31). If it is determined that it is not 0 (G31; No), the second display is performed. 1 is subtracted from the counter value (G33). Then, after performing control to display the number of second predetermined images corresponding to the second display counter value on the first display unit 430 (G35), the second special image display process is terminated.

  Also by performing such second special image display processing, the player who displays and hides the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image appropriately according to the number of balls possessed by the player and plays with the gaming machine In addition, it is possible to inform the surrounding players of the game state (the number of possessed game media) of the player in an easily understandable manner.

[1-10-2. Special image]
During or after counting the number of possessed balls by the counting payout unit 380, a special image display process may be executed to display a special image. Further, the number of possessed balls may be updated in real time based on the counting result of the counting payout unit 380, and the special image may be displayed together with the number of possessed balls. Further, a special image may be displayed together with information on a prepaid balance and a card balance owned by the player.

  Further, a special image display process may be executed to display a special image during ball lending or ball lending by the card unit 300. Also in this case, the number of possessed balls may be displayed together with the ball lending screen, or the number of possessed balls and the special image may be displayed together with the ball lending screen. Further, as described above, information on the prepaid balance and the card balance owned by the player may be displayed together.

[2. Second Embodiment]
[2-1. Game system configuration]
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a second gaming system 1B in the second embodiment.

  The second gaming system 1B is different in that an external server 700 is provided in addition to the components of the first gaming system 1A.

  The external server 700 is a server provided outside the store, and is installed in, for example, a management company that manages personal data of players who play in the store. In the present embodiment, the external server 700 receives personal game history information transmitted from the mobile phone 16A possessed by the player, and generates mobile display data that is display data for the mobile phone. Then, the generated mobile display data is distributed to the mobile phone 16A. The external server 700 is communicably connected to the player terminal and functions as an information distribution device that distributes information to the player terminal.

[2-2. Information and signal flow]
FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of information and signal flows in the second gaming system.
Here, parts different from the information and signal flow in the first gaming system described in FIG. 2 will be described.

  In the second gaming system 1B, the mobile phone 16A downloads a gaming history display application from the external server 700. Then, the mobile phone 16A acquires the personal game history data output from the data display device 400, as described in the first embodiment. Then, the mobile phone 16A transmits the personal game history data received from the data display device 400 to the external server 700 as terminal specifying information in accordance with the player's operation.

  When the external server 700 receives the personal game history data from the mobile phone 16A, the external server 700 processes the received personal game history data so that the player can view the personal game history information with the game history display application. For mobile display. Then, the external server 700 distributes the generated display data to the mobile phone 16A.

  When receiving display data from the external server 700, the mobile phone 16A activates the downloaded game history display application and uses the display data received from the external server 700 to display personal game history information on the display unit. indicate.

[2-3. Functional configuration of external server]
FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the external server 700. As illustrated in FIG.
The external server 700 includes a processing unit 710, an input unit 720, a display unit 725, a sound output unit 730, a clock unit 735, a first communication unit 740, a second communication unit 750, a ROM 770, and a hard disk 770. And a hard disk 780, a RAM 790, and a computer system in which each unit is connected via a bus.

  The processing unit 710 is configured to include a processor such as a CPU and a DSP, and an electric and electronic element such as an ASIC that control each unit of the external server 700 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the ROM 770. Device and arithmetic unit. In the present embodiment, the processing unit 610 includes a personal data management unit 711, a portable display data generation unit 713, and a digital content distribution unit 715 as main functional units.

  The input unit 720 is an input unit configured to include a keyboard and a mouse, for example, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the processing unit 710. By an operation input from the input unit 720, an instruction operation such as editing of data in various databases stored in the hard disk 780 is performed.

  The display unit 725 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the processing unit 710, and includes an LCD or the like. The display unit 725 displays data contents of various databases stored in the hard disk 780.

  The sound output unit 730 is a sound output device such as a speaker that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 710. From the sound output unit 730, for example, a warning sound or the like for notifying the administrator when a warning is issued or when an abnormality occurs is output.

  The clock unit 735 is an internal clock provided in the external server 700, and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The clocked time (including date) of the clock unit 635 is output to the processing unit 710.

  The first communication unit 740 is a communication device for communicating with the mobile phone 16A. For example, the first communication unit 740 includes a wireless communication module for performing wireless communication with the mobile phone 16A using a wireless communication method. Configured. First communication unit 740 receives an access request signal from mobile phone 16A. In addition, the first communication unit 740 distributes the game history display application, mobile display data, and digital content to the mobile phone 16A under the control of the processing unit 710.

  The second communication unit 750 is a communication device for communicating with an external device, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. For example, the second communication unit 750 communicates with the hall computer 600 installed in each store to transmit various data to the hall computer 600 and receive various data from the hall computer 600.

  The ROM 770 is a read-only nonvolatile storage device, and stores various programs such as a system program for the external server 700. In the present embodiment, the ROM 770 stores an external server processing program 771 that is read by the processing unit 710 and executed as an external server process.

  The external server 700 may be configured not to include the ROM 770 as a storage device. In this case, the various programs described above may be stored in, for example, the hard disk 780.

  The hard disk 680 is a readable and writable nonvolatile external storage device, and stores various databases related to various processes in the external server 700. Specifically, a personal database 781 for managing personal information of a player who possesses the mobile phone 16A, a personal game history database 783 for managing personal game history data transmitted from the mobile phone 16A, An application database 785 that stores various applications for the telephone 16A and a digital content database 787 that stores digital contents to be given to the mobile phone 16A are stored.

  The digital content database 787 stores digital data such as wallpaper, cursors, icons, etc. for mobile phones of characters appearing in various types of pachinko machines 200A. The digital content can be distributed to the mobile phone 16A. The digital content is not limited to digital data for mobile phones, and may be digital data such as wallpaper, screen savers, cursors, icons, and the like for player terminals such as tablet terminals and PDAs possessed by players.

  The RAM 790 is a readable / writable volatile memory. The RAM 790 stores portable display data 791 generated by the portable display data generation unit 713.

[2-4. Process flow]
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of external server processing executed by the processing unit 710 of the external server 700 in accordance with the external server processing program 711 stored in the ROM 770.

  First, the processing unit 710 determines whether or not an access request signal is received from the mobile phone 16A (H1). If it is determined that the access request signal is received (H1; Yes), communication with the mobile phone 16A is performed. Establish.

  Next, the processing unit 710 determines whether or not a reception request for a game history display application is made from the mobile phone 16A (H3). If it is determined that the reception request has been made (H3; Yes), the processing unit 710 carries the game history display application from the applications stored in the application database 785 of the hard disk 780 in accordance with the download operation from the mobile phone 16A. Distribute to the telephone 16A (H5).

  Next, the processing unit 710 determines whether or not a mobile display data reception request is made from the mobile phone 16A (H7). If it is determined that a reception request is made (H7; Yes), the processing unit 710 asks the mobile phone 16A to Then, a transmission request for transmitting the personal game history data to the external server 700 is made (H9).

  If the personal game history data is received, the processing unit 710 stores the received personal game history data in the personal game history database 783 of the hard disk 780 (H11). Then, the portable display data generation unit 713 performs portable display data generation processing for generating portable display data 791 (H13).

  Next, in accordance with the download operation from the mobile phone 16A, the processing unit 710 distributes the mobile display data 791 generated by the mobile display data generation processing to the mobile phone 16A (H15).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 710 determines whether or not a privilege grant condition is established (H17). The privilege granting condition can be determined as, for example, that the specific personal game history information acquired by the player playing with a plurality of types of pachinko machines 200A satisfies a specific condition. Specifically, for example, the “number of withdrawals within 10 remaining ST rotations” included in the specific personal game history information in “Pachinko XXX” has reached the first specified number (for example, 5 times), and “Pachinko YYY” It can be determined as a specific grant condition that the “number of 16 rounds probable big hit consecutive resorts” included in the specific personal game history information has reached the second specified number (for example, 10 times).

  In addition, said privilege provision conditions are an example to the last, and of course, various conditions can be defined as privilege provision conditions. For example, as described above, in addition to the specific personal game history information acquired when a player plays with a plurality of types of pachinko machines 200A satisfying a specific condition, the player can play with one type of pachinko machine 200A. It may be determined that the specific personal game history information acquired by playing the game satisfies the specific condition as the specific provision condition.

  If it is determined that the privilege granting condition is satisfied (H15; Yes), the processing unit 710 performs a process of notifying the player who has the mobile phone 16A of permission to distribute the digital content to the mobile phone 16A. Perform (H19). For example, a message such as “You can present digital content. Please download” is displayed on the mobile phone 16A to prompt the player to download the digital content.

  Next, the processing unit 710 determines whether or not a request for digital content has been made from the mobile phone 16A (H21). If it is determined that the request has been made (H21; Yes), the digital content distribution unit 715 distributes the digital content to the mobile phone 16A according to the download operation from the mobile phone 16A (H23). Specifically, for example, of the digital content stored in the digital content database 787, the digital content corresponding to the model of the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the specific personal game history data for which the privilege granting condition is satisfied is stored in the mobile phone 16A. To deliver.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 710 determines whether or not to end the process (H25). If it is determined to continue the process (H25; No), the process returns to H1. If it is determined that the process is to be ended (H25; Yes), the processing unit 710 ends the external server process.

[2-5. Modified example]
In the embodiment described above, when the mobile phone 16A receives personal game history data from the data display device 400, the received personal game history data is transmitted to the external server 700 as terminal specifying information. That is, in the above embodiment, the individual game history (common individual game history, unique individual game history) itself is described as terminal specifying information, and the individual game history is transmitted to the external server 700.

  However, in addition to the above configuration, for example, a mail requesting that the mobile phone 16A acquires personal game history data from the data display device 400 or the hall computer 600 (hereinafter referred to as “game history acquisition request mail”). May be transmitted to the external server 700 as terminal identification information. When the external server 700 receives a game history acquisition request mail from the mobile phone 16A, the external server 700 communicates with the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600 (wired communication or wireless communication) to thereby store the individual game history of the player. Data may be acquired, mobile display data may be generated using the acquired personal game history data, and the mobile display data may be distributed to the mobile phone 16A.

[3. Third Embodiment]
[3-1. Game system]
Since the system configuration of the three gaming system 1C in the third embodiment is the same as the system configuration of the second gaming system 1B described in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[3-2. Information and signal flow]
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of information and signals between devices in the third gaming system 1C.

  In the third gaming system 1C, the data display device 400 outputs the total gaming history data and the individual gaming history data to the hall computer 600. The hall computer 600 transmits the total game history data and the personal game history data output from the data display device 400 to the external server 700.

  The external server 700 generates mobile display data using the personal game history data received from the hall computer 600, and the generated mobile display data is received from the mobile phone 16A according to the mobile display data reception request from the mobile phone 16A. Deliver to.

  In the third gaming system 1C, the code generation unit 419 of the data display device 400 generates a code obtained by decoding the URL information for the mobile phone 16A to access the external server 700 in accordance with the code display operation by the player. Then, the data display device 4 displays the generated code on the first display unit 430.

  The mobile phone 16A reads the code displayed on the first display unit 430 in accordance with the player's operation, and decodes the URL information from the read code. Then, using a communication network such as the Internet, the external server 700 is accessed based on the decoded URL information, and portable display data and digital content are downloaded from the external server 700 as in the third embodiment.

[4. Fourth Embodiment]
[4-1. Game system]
FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a fourth gaming system 1D in the fourth embodiment.
The fourth gaming system 1D includes a plurality of pachinko machines 200A that are a kind of gaming machine installed on a game island (not shown), a gaming device, an information display device, and a recording medium that are provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 200A. A card unit 300A which is a kind of processing device, a hall computer 600 which is a kind of management device and control device, a ball management computer 800 which is a kind of management device and control device, and a pachinko machine 200A. It comprises a call lamp device 9 which is a kind of game device and information display device.

  The card unit 300A is installed on a side position of the pachinko machine 200A (for example, on the left side of the pachinko machine 200A) in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 200A, and for card players who are not registered as members in the game hall A visitor card that is a game recording medium issued or a member card that is a game recording medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member of a game hall, , Generically referred to as a “card”)) based on the value of the valuable value (prepaid balance) specified from the game value identification information (prepaid balance data) recorded on the pachinko machine 200A. Counting the number of game balls acquired in the process for lending game balls, which are game media to be played, and games in the pachinko machine 200A, It performs processing for paying out game balls within a few pre game balls number of.

  On the front surface of the card unit 300A, a multi-function lamp that is configured by a full-color LED and is lit in a plurality of colors so that the state of the card unit 300A can be notified, a bill insertion slot for inserting bills, A display device that protrudes from the front of the device to the front of the device, a payout button for accepting a counting payout operation for paying out the low counted balls, and a card insertion slot for inserting a membership card or a visitor card Is provided.

  The card unit 300A is configured to be able to pay out not only the counted number of balls but also the number of stored balls and the number of held balls by pressing the payout button. Specifically, control is performed to cause the pachinko machine 200A to pay out the game balls by CR communication that transmits a payout signal from the card unit 300A to the pachinko machine 200A.

  A card insertion slot provided on the front surface of the card unit 300A is connected to a card slot of a card reader / writer built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot, and a visitor card or a member is inserted through this card insertion slot. The card can be inserted into the card slot.

  Here, in the visitor card and the membership card, a non-volatile memory for storing various data and control for rewriting and reading out the recorded information and non-contact communication with an external reader / writer device. An IC card on which an IC chip having a card portion is mounted is used, and in these visitor cards and member cards, card IDs that can identify individual cards are stored in advance so as not to be rewritten. The type is identified from the card ID, and various types of data such as prepaid balance data that can specify the prepaid balance are stored.

  The member card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall, and a member ID assigned to the member is stored in a non-rewritable manner. In addition, as will be described later, the member player using the membership card can use the game balls once acquired and counted for the game again after the next day, or to store the balls that can be used for prize exchange. However, the membership card does not directly record the number of balls that are the number of game balls in which the balls have been stored, and the number of balls to be stored is the ball management computer 800 as will be described later. Are stored in association with the member card ID and the member ID, so that the member card ID and the member ID are specified.

  Also, the membership card does not directly record the number of balls based on the counted number of balls counted by the player who owns the membership card. By being stored in association with the member ID, it is specified from the member card ID or member ID, and the number of possessed balls can be used in the game in each card unit 300A in the game hall only on that day. It can be used, and can be used for prize exchange at a prize exchange POS terminal (not shown).

  The visitor card is purchased and issued by a card issuing / depositing machine (not shown) installed in the amusement hall and is also issued by the card unit 300A. The visitor card stores the number of balls and date based on the counted number of balls counted by the player who owns the visitor card, and the number of balls is stored only on the day of the game. The card unit 300A can be used for games, and can be used for prize exchange at the prize exchange POS terminal.

  The calling lamp device 9 is a kind of gaming device and information display device that has a horizontally long box shape when viewed from the front, and is used by a player playing a game on the pachinko machine 200A to call a store clerk, In response to a signal from the pachinko machine 200A, game information regarding the pachinko machine 200A is displayed on the display unit 930 provided on the front surface.

  Each pachinko machine 200A is configured to be individually identifiable by a machine number. The pachinko machine 200A, the card unit 300A, and the calling lamp device 900 are connected to the hall computer 600 and the ball management computer 800 via the machine terminal 1000. ing. In FIG. 45, for simplicity, four pachinko machines 200A installed on the amusement island are illustrated.

[4-2. Information and signal flow]
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of information and signals between the devices of the fourth gaming system 1D. In FIG. 46, the illustration of the base terminal 1000 is omitted for simplification of description.

In the fourth gaming system 1D, the card unit 300A collects game history information,
The total game history data and the personal game history data are output to the hall computer 600. Similarly to the data display device 400 in the first gaming system 1A, the card unit 300 displays a two-dimensional code (specific information) obtained by encoding individual game history data on the display unit, and displays the displayed two-dimensional code. The personal game history data is output to the mobile phone 16A by causing the mobile phone 16A to read it.

[4-3. Functional configuration of card unit]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the card unit 300A.
The display device 355 of the card unit 300A has a menu button 316a for menu selection, a base data button 316b for displaying base data, and a membership card ID recorded on the membership card when a membership card is received. And a replay button 316c for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the member ID, a volume / light quantity change button 316ed for changing the volume / light quantity, a left / right up / down key, and a determination key. An operation button 316 including a cross button 316e is provided.

  In addition, the display device 355 receives an infrared signal from a replay display unit 317 for notifying that the operation of the replay button 316c is valid and a setting remote control owned by a staff of the game hall, An IR light receiving unit 315 that converts the signal into an output is provided, and a transparent touch panel 314 is provided on the surface of the display device 355 so that each display item displayed on the display device 355 can be input with a finger. Is provided.

  Note that both the touch panel 314 and the operation button 316 may be an operation unit according to the present invention, and any one of the touch panel 314 and the operation button 316 may be an operation unit according to the present invention. That is, only the touch panel 314 may be provided as the operation means, or only the operation button 316 may be provided. In addition, operations that can be performed by the respective operation means may be set so that the respective operations do not overlap, or may be set so that some or all of the operations overlap.

  The display device 355 is provided with switches corresponding to a liquid crystal display 313 and operation buttons 316, which will be described later, and a display control board 329 provided at a position in the device corresponding to the display device 355. The display control board 329 performs display control of the liquid crystal display 313, input position detection using the transparent touch panel 314, and the like.

  At the upper position in the card unit 300A, the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot is taken in, the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot is taken in, the authenticity and bill type are identified, and the identification result is displayed at the central part of the device. A banknote identification unit 302a that outputs to a control unit 305, which will be described later, is provided. In the banknote identification unit 302a, various banknotes (10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 2,000 yen, and 1,000 yen banknotes) are provided. Reception is possible.

  Further, a control unit 305 for controlling the operation of the card unit 300A is provided at a substantially central position of the card unit 300A so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the card unit 300A. Various operations of the card unit 300A are controlled by the control unit 305.

  Also, at the lowermost position of the card unit 300A, the game balls are counted and taken in, and the counted game balls are the maximum fraction, that is, less than 125 units less than the unit of payout in the corresponding pachinko machine 200A. A count payout unit 380 is provided that stores only the maximum value of 24, and counts and pays out game balls with a fraction less than the unit.

  The card unit 300A is a control unit that provides various functions of the card unit 300A by controlling each part of the bill recognition unit 302a, the card reader / writer 327, the display control board 329, and the card unit 300A by a control program. The bill recognition unit 302a, the card reader / writer 327, and the display control board 329 are connected to the control unit 305 so that various data can be transmitted and received.

  The card reader / writer 327 reads recorded information such as a member card ID / visitor card ID, a member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, etc. recorded in the member card / visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 309. And writing.

  The control unit 305 includes a processing unit 310, a ROM 320, a RAM 330, and a clock unit 335.

  The processing unit 310 is a control device and an arithmetic device that include a processor such as a CPU and a DSP that control the card unit 300A in an integrated manner.

  The ROM 320 is a nonvolatile read-only storage device, and stores a card unit processing program 321 that is read by the processing unit 310 and executed as card unit processing. The card unit processing program 321 includes a common general game history information totaling program 491b executed as a common general game history information totaling process, a common individual game history information totaling program 491c executed as a common personal game history information totaling process, A plurality of specific total game history information totaling programs 491d executed as total game history information totaling processing, a plurality of specific individual game history information totaling programs 491e executed as specific individual game history information totaling processing, and special image display processing A special image display program 491e to be executed is included as a subroutine. Note that the processing executed by these programs is the same as that in the above embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The ROM 320 stores a special image display threshold table 495 as a table. The table configuration of the special image display threshold value table 495 is also the same as that in the above embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The RAM 330 is a volatile readable / writable storage device, and the number of possessed balls in which the number of possessed balls of the player is stored in addition to the card ID and prepaid balance of the visitor card and membership card being accepted by the card reader / writer 327. Data 496, general game history data 497, and personal game history data 498 are stored. Since various data stored in the RAM 330 is the same as that in the above embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  The control unit 305 is configured to be able to lend a predetermined number of unit balls to the player by sending and receiving lending-related signals to and from the payout control board provided in the pachinko machine 200A. ing. Therefore, the card unit 300A functions as a game medium lending processing device that executes a lending process for lending a game medium to a player who plays a game machine. The control unit 305 is connected to an information output board of the pachinko machine 200A via a signal cable, so that various external output signals such as a big hit signal can be input.

  The control unit 305 is connected to an out ball counter 16 provided at a lower position of the corresponding pachinko machine 200A so that a driving signal from the out ball counter 16 can be input. In response to the input of the driving signal from the counter 16, a predetermined number corresponding to the driving signal is added to the value of the total driving balls and updated.

  The control unit 305 is connected to the count payout unit 380, and receives a count sensor signal output when the game balls are counted in the count payout unit 380, and based on the count sensor signal Update the local counting ball count. For example, as described above, a game ball that has flowed into the count payout unit 380 is detected by a counting sensor, and a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is sent from the count payout unit 380 to the control unit 305 in response to detection of one game ball. Is output.

  The control unit 305 is connected to a payout button switch 311 ′ corresponding to a payout button provided at a lower position of the display device 355 on the front surface of the apparatus, and a signal corresponding to the operation of the payout button is sent to the payout button switch. By inputting from 311 ', the presence or absence of operation of the payout button can be grasped. When detecting that the payout button has been pressed, the control unit 305 pays back a predetermined number of unit balls to the player.

  The control unit 305 subtracts and updates the corresponding possessed ball number data 496 stored in the RAM 330 each time a refund operation is performed.

  In addition, as described above, the control unit 305 includes a remaining amount indicator provided in the operation unit of the corresponding pachinko machine 200A, a lending button switch that detects the operation of the lending button, a member card and a visitor card that are being accepted. A return button switch that detects the operation of the return button that is operated when returning the item is connected, and the operation of the lending button and the operation of the return button can be detected, and the display control of these remaining amount indicators is performed.

  The control unit 305 outputs various information input from the display control board 329 according to the output from the IR light receiving unit 315 according to transmission from the remote controller, the operation of various buttons provided on the display device 355, or the operation of the touch panel. The full color provided in the multifunction lamp connected to the control unit 305 in response to the currency identification information by the banknote identification unit 302a, the card insertion information from the card reader / writer 327, the visitor card storage state information, etc. Overall operation control is performed such as lighting control of each LED such as the LED 301a, control of the card reader / writer 327 and the display control board 329, display control of the balance indicator, and the like.

  In addition, the control unit 305 determines whether the membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot can be used or not, and prepaid based on the prepaid balance data read from the accepted membership card or visitor card. Loan processing that uses the remaining amount for lending, and issuance by depositing the remaining prepaid amount on the receiving membership card or visitor card or writing the remaining prepaid amount to a new visitor card according to the receipt of money・ Return processing to return the member card or visitor card being accepted by the return operation with the deposit processing or the return button, the replay processing using the number of stored balls, the local counting number of balls or insertion by accepting the operation of the payout button 311 The number of balls specified by the visitor card and membership card Removed by 貯玉 number, it executes a process of dispensing processing for subtracting update payout the number of balls that issued 該払 performed (return) from the counting already piece count from the number of lifting balls).

  The control unit 305 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 600 and a ball management computer 800 connected to a local area network (LAN) via a HUB so as to be able to perform data communication. Various data can be sent and received.

  The display control board 329 connected to the control unit 305 includes a liquid crystal display 313 constituting the display device 355, a transparent touch panel 314, switches corresponding to various operation buttons 316, an IR light receiving unit 315, and the replay display described above. Electronic components such as LEDs 320a provided in the unit are connected, and the operation information of the transparent touch panel 314, the operation information of various switches, and the information based on the output signal output from the IR light receiving unit 315 are displayed on the display control board. Is output to the control unit 305 via the terminal 329.

  In the display control board 329 of the present embodiment, a display driving circuit (not shown) that performs display driving of the liquid crystal display 313 and a position that is pressed based on an output signal from the transparent touch panel 314 are specified and specified. An input position detection circuit (not shown) for outputting the input position information, a VDP (not shown) for processing related to a display image displayed on the display device 355, a VROM for storing image data used for menu display, etc. (Not shown), VRAM (not shown) that temporarily stores display data to be displayed on the display device 355, and independent of the control unit 305, judgments and processes associated with inputs from various switches and touch panels are based on the processing program. Display control microcomputer etc. are implemented, and based on display data (page data) etc. output from the control unit 305, each The display screen, and is capable of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 313 constituting the display device 355.

  The card unit 300A is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member game registered as a member in the game hall. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a person, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The card unit 300A that accepts these cards converts the game value (for example, the number of balls stored on the day, the number of balls stored in the past, the number of balls held, the prepaid balance, etc.) specified by the record information of the card into the number of games. It has a function. In other words, in order to enable a player to play using the number of game balls corresponding to the game value, the game value is converted into the corresponding number of game balls based on the ball lending operation or payout operation, and converted. Controls lending or paying out a number of game balls to the player.

  When the card unit 300A accepts a membership card, the replay game using the membership card ID recorded on the membership card (hereinafter simply referred to as “card ID”) and the number of balls specified by the card ID. A replay button is provided for performing the operation.

  When the replay button is operated, if there is a number of balls or coins corresponding to the inserted card, a part of the number of balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball. Based on the converted game ball Thus, it becomes possible to play a game with the pachinko machine 200A. If the inserted card is a membership card and the number of stored balls is recorded in the ball management computer 800, a portion of the number of stored balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls, which can be played by the pachinko machine 200A. It becomes.

  The “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired by the player, and corresponds to the number of game media stored by the player. The number of stored balls is managed by the ball management computer 800. The number of stored balls cannot be recorded on the membership card, and the number of stored balls managed by the ball management computer 800 is transmitted to the card unit 300A in response to the card unit 300A receiving the membership card.

  The number of stored balls acquired by the player on the day is transferred and managed by the ball management computer 800 in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition can be determined, for example, as a tightening process being performed after the store operation ends on the day. The closing process is based on the fact that the time has reached a predetermined closing time (for example, midnight, midnight, midnight), that the store manager has performed an operation to execute the closing process, or that the store is closed. The processing is executed in response to the establishment of a condition such as that the power of the ball management computer 800 is once cut off and the power of the ball management computer 800 is turned on for the next business day. By executing this tightening process, the number of balls stored on the day is added to the number of balls stored in the past and reset, and managed as the number of balls stored in the past from the next business day. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of balls stored on that day is determined as the number of balls stored by the player on that day.

  It should be noted that a predetermined condition can be set for the number of balls already counted. For example, after the player finishes the game and performs a return operation to return the game card (member card or visitor card), the game card is returned in response to the return operation, and then the ball management computer 800 from the card unit 300A. On the other hand, it can be determined as a predetermined condition that the local counting ball number stored in the local counting ball number data 333 of the RAM 330 is transmitted. By satisfying this predetermined condition, the locally counted number of balls is managed by being added to the number of balls stored on the day and the number of balls held.

  “Mochitama” refers to the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the number of balls managed by the ball management computer 800 in association with the visitor card ID is defined as the number of balls in order to be distinguished from the day's stored balls. In the present embodiment, the number of balls will be described as being managed by the ball management computer 800. Unlike the present embodiment, the number of possessed balls may be directly recorded on the visitor card.

  As described above, the number of stored balls is not directly recorded on the member card, but can be stored and managed in association with the member card ID in the ball management computer 800, whereby the corresponding number of stored balls can be searched based on the member card ID. It is configured as follows. Further, the number of possessed balls is also stored and managed in correspondence with the visitor card ID in the ball management computer 800, so that the corresponding number of retained balls can be searched based on the visitor card ID.

  When the card unit 300A accepts the membership card, the card management computer 800 requests the ball management computer 800 to transmit the number of balls. The ball management computer 800 transmits the number of balls to the card unit 300A and stores it in the RAM 330. Further, when the card unit 300 </ b> A receives the visitor card, the number of balls recorded on the visitor card is read by the card R / W 327 and stored in the RAM 330.

  When the player finishes the game and the card unit 300A returns the membership card, the number of accumulated balls subtracted by using the accumulated balls is transmitted to the ball management computer 800 together with the counted number of balls, and the counted number of balls is the number of accumulated balls on that day. Is added to When the visitor card is returned, the counted number of balls is added to the number of balls that have been subtracted due to the use of the ball and is recorded on the visitor card.

  Further, the card unit 300A and the pachinko machine 200A are configured to be able to lend a game ball of a predetermined number of unit balls as a payout unit to a player by sending and receiving a lending-related signal. Therefore, the card unit 300A functions as a game medium lending processing device that executes a lending process for lending a game medium to a player who plays a game machine. The lending-related signal includes a lending request signal for lending a game ball according to the prepaid balance from the card unit 300A to the pachinko machine 200A, a terminal terminal lending completion signal output from the pachinko machine 200A, a stand READY signal, Signals such as an inter-counter counting unit READY signal and a terminal terminal lending request completion confirmation signal are included.

  Also, from the pachinko machine 200A, a game signal such as a big hit signal, a probable change signal, a short and middle signal, a winning ball signal, a start signal, and a driving ball counter (not shown) provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 200A. It is comprised so that reception can be received.

[4-4. Functional configuration of ball management computer]
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the ball management computer 800.
The ball management computer 800 includes a processing unit 810, an input unit 820, a display unit 830, a communication unit 840, a clock unit 850, a printing unit 860, and a storage unit 880, and each unit has a bus. It is a computer system connected through

  The processing unit 810 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control each unit of the ball management computer 800 in accordance with various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 880, and includes a processor such as a CPU or DSP. Configured.

  The input unit 820 is an input unit configured to include, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the processing unit 810.

  The display unit 830 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the processing unit 810, and includes an LCD or the like. The display unit 830 displays data contents of various databases stored in the storage unit 860.

  The communication unit 840 is a communication device for performing communication with the card unit 300A, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable.

  The clock unit 850 is an internal clock included in the ball management computer 800, and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The time measured (including date) of the clock unit 850 is output to the processing unit 810 as needed.

  The storage unit 860 is a storage device configured to include a memory such as a ROM, a flash ROM, and a RAM, and an external storage device such as a hard disk.

  The storage unit 860 stores a ball management program 861 that is read by the processing unit 810 and executed as a ball management process. In addition, member management data 863, card management data 865, and unit management data 867 are stored.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the member management data 863.
The member management data 863 stores member information data and member game history data. The member information data stores member personal information. Specifically, for example, a member ID for uniquely identifying a member, a personal identification number set by the member, a visit point given to the member every time the store is visited, and a store point The rank set for the member, the last name of the member, and the name of the member are stored.

  In the member game history data, a member ID, a visit date, a machine number, a model name, a start time, and an end time are stored in association with each other. The start time is the time when the member starts playing the game with the pachinko machine 200A having the serial number. The end time is the time when the member ends the game with the pachinko machine 200A with the serial number.

FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a data configuration of the card management data 865.
The card management data 865 stores member card management data and visitor card management data.

  The membership card management data is data for managing the membership card. For example, the card ID for uniquely identifying the membership card, the membership ID, the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls, and the number of jackpots correspond to each other. It is memorized.

  Visitor card management data is data for managing visitor cards. For example, the card ID for making the visitor card unique, the latest issue date and time that is the latest issue date and time of the visitor card, the number of possessions The number of jackpots is stored in association with each other.

FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of the data configuration of the unit management data 867.
In the unit management data 867, a unit ID uniquely assigned to each card unit 300A installed in the game arcade, a local IP storing the local IP address of the card unit 300A, and the card unit 300A are installed. A game island, a corresponding machine number of the pachinko machine 200A corresponding to the card unit 300A, a situation indicating whether the card unit 300A is accepting or waiting for a card, and a game card being accepted The reception card type that is the type, the reception card ID that is the card ID of the game card being received, and the number of local counting balls of the card unit 300A are stored in association with each other. The data of the local counting ball number is periodically transmitted from each card unit 300A in response to the reception of the transmission request from the ball management computer 800, and after a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) after the change of the counted ball number ), The latest counted number of balls is managed by being transmitted from each card unit 300A.

[4-5. Process flow]
52 and 53 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of card unit processing executed by the processing unit 310 of the card unit 300A in accordance with the card unit processing program 321a stored in the ROM 320.

  First, the processing unit 310 starts the common total game history information totaling process according to the common total game history information totaling program 491b stored in the ROM 320 (I1). Further, the processing unit 310 starts the specific total game history information totaling process according to the specific total game history information totaling program 491d stored in the ROM 320 (I3).

  Next, the processing unit 310 executes personal game history information aggregation processing (I5). The personal game history information aggregation process is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. In this case, the start of the game by the player can be detected by inserting a membership card or a visitor card into the card insertion / discharge port. With the detection of the start of the game, the processing unit 310 starts the common personal game history information totaling process according to the common personal game history information totaling program 491c stored in the ROM 320, and the specific individual game history according to the specific personal game historical information totaling program 491e. Start the information aggregation process.

  Further, the end of the game by the player can be detected by discharging the member card or visitor card being accepted from the card insertion / discharge port. With the detection of the end of the game, the processing unit 310 ends the common personal game history information totaling process and the specific personal game history information totaling process being executed.

  Note that a game start button may be provided in the card unit 300, and when the game start button is pressed, the game start by the player may be detected by determining that the player has started the game. . Further, a game end button may be provided in the card unit 300, and when the game end button is pressed, it is determined that the player has ended the game, thereby detecting the game end by the player. .

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a card return operation has been performed (I7), and if it is determined that it has been performed (I7; Yes), performs a card return process (I9). Specifically, control is performed to eject the game card being accepted from the card insertion / discharge port.

  If it is determined that the card return operation has not been performed (I7; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether the holding ball summing operation has been performed (I11), and if it has been determined (I5; Yes), Mochitama summation processing is performed (I13).

  If it is determined that the coin holding operation has not been performed (I11; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a card lock operation has been performed (I15). If it is determined that the card lock operation has been performed (I15; Yes), Card lock processing is performed (J17). Specifically, the inserted card is locked so as not to be returned only by pressing the card return button 312. After the lock, for example, the player is requested to input a password, and the card is not returned to the player unless the correct password is input.

  If it is determined that the card lock operation has not been performed (I15; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the ball split operation has been performed (I19), and if it is determined that it has been performed (I19; Yes), Mochitama split processing is performed (I21).

  If it is determined that the holding ball split operation has not been performed (I19; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not an information inquiry operation has been performed (I23), and if it has been determined (I23; Yes), Information inquiry processing is performed (I25). Specifically, in accordance with the player's operation, the display device 355 displays information such as the prepaid balance (payment balance), the number of balls, and the number of balls.

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the ball count result is input from the counting payout unit 380 (I31), and if it is determined that it is input (I31; Yes), the possession ball number data 331 is updated ( I33). Then, the processing unit 310 executes special image display processing according to the special image display program 491f stored in the ROM 320 (I35).

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a game ball payout operation has been performed by the player (I37). If it is determined that the game ball has been played (I37; Yes), the payout is to pay back a predetermined number of unit balls. A control process is executed (I39). Then, the processing unit 310 updates the number of possessed balls (I41), and executes special image display processing according to the special image display program 491f stored in the ROM 320 (I43).

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not to end the process (I45). If it is determined to continue the process (I45; No), the process returns to I7. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is to be terminated (I47; Yes), the card unit process is terminated.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the holding ball summing process.
The possession ball summing process is a process of summing up the possession balls associated with a plurality of cards and associating them with one card.

  The processing unit 310 determines whether or not a membership card is being accepted (J3). When the membership card is being accepted (J3; Yes), the processing unit 310 instructs the input of a personal identification number (J5). Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the collation result is OK (J7). If it is OK (J7; Yes), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the membership card has a ball (J9). ).

  If it is determined that there is a holding ball (J9; Yes), the processing unit 310 invalidates the visitor card at the reading position of the card reader / writer 327 and discharges the membership card (J11). Then, the processing unit 310 instructs the player to insert a membership card or a visitor card (J13).

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a card is inserted within a predetermined time (J15), and if it is determined that the card is inserted (J15; Yes), the holding ball is transferred to the inserted card (J17). . Then, the processing unit 310 transmits the card information of the inserted card to the possession management computer 800 (J19), and then ejects the inserted card (J21). And the process part 310 complete | finishes the holding ball total process.

  When the determination result of J3, J7, J9, or J15 is a negative determination, the processing unit 310 performs error notification (J23). And the process part 310 complete | finishes the holding ball total process.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the possession ball dividing process.
The internal ball splitting process is a process of splitting the internal ball of one card (dividing source card) and associating it with a plurality of cards. In the present embodiment, some of the possessed balls of the accepted membership cards (hereinafter referred to as “dividing source cards”) are referred to as other new visitor cards (hereinafter referred to as “dividing destination cards”). ), And the remaining possession balls are left on the original card.

  First, the processing unit 310 instructs to input a personal identification number (K3). Next, it is determined whether or not the collation result is OK (K5), and if it is determined that it is OK (K5; Yes), whether or not the holding ball is more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. Is determined (K7). When the number of possessed balls is less than the number corresponding to the lending unit amount (K7; No), since it is usually not possible to pay out the possessed balls, the number of possessed balls is combined with the amount of the card to be divided. Need to be at least twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount.

  If it determines with it being 2 times or more (K7; Yes), the process part 310 will display-control the screen for inputting the number of balls to divide | segment (K9). The number of divisions can be selected from choices, or can be input by increasing or decreasing the number of units corresponding to the lending unit amount by operating the increase or decrease button, or a numerical value can be directly input You may do it.

  The processing unit 310 waits until the number of divisions is input (K11; No). If it is determined that the number is input (K11; Yes), the processing unit 310 determines whether the member card is being accepted (K13). If it is determined that the membership card is being received (K13; Yes), the processing unit 310 subtracts the number of divisions from the number of possessed balls (K15).

  Next, the processing unit 310 discharges the membership card (K17). Next, the processing unit 310 takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit provided in the card reader / writer to the reading position, and performs the issue processing of the taken out visitor card (K19). Specifically, the status of the visitor saving management table of the possession management computer 800 is changed during use, the latest issue date is updated, and the latest issue date of the visitor saving management table of the possession management computer 800 is updated. Reset other items in both tables.

  Then, the processing unit 310 associates the number of divisions with the visitor card as the number of balls (K21). Specifically, the number of divisions is stored as the number of balls in the visitor saving management table of the ball management computer 800. Next, the processing unit 310 discharges the visitor card (K23).

  Next, the processing unit 310 informs the user that the member card that has been ejected is urged to be reinserted (K25). The processing unit 310 waits until the membership card is inserted (K27; Yes), and if inserted (K27; Yes), transmits the card information to the possession management computer 800 (K41). And the process part 310 complete | finishes the possession ball division | segmentation process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted (K13; No), the processing unit 310 temporarily saves the card information of the accepted visitor card in another memory area (K29). Then, the processing unit 310 resets the card information of the visitor card at the reading / writing position being accepted and performs the issuing process (K31). Next, the processing unit 310 records the number of divisions as the number of balls on the visitor card (K33), and discharges the visitor card (K35).

  Next, the processing unit 310 takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer to the reading position, and performs a process for issuing the taken out visitor card (K37). Then, the processing unit 310 records the card information saved in K29 on the visitor card (K39). And the process part 310 transfers a process to K41.

[4-6. Display screen]
56 and 57 are diagrams showing examples of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 313 of the card unit 300A.

FIG. 56 (1) is a diagram showing an example of the total game history data screen.
On this general game history data screen, the total number of big hits and the number of start today are displayed as common total game history information at the top of the screen. In addition, specific total game history information is displayed in a double frame provided below. More specifically, “Now, the total game history” is displayed as the title, and the ST entry number, the short-time entry number, and the ST entry rate are displayed as the specific integrated game history information.

FIG. 56 (2) shows an example of the personal game history data screen.
On the personal game history data screen, the number of personal big hits today and the number of personal maximum consecutive days are displayed as common personal game history information at the top of the screen. Further, in the double frame provided below, “Now, individual gaming history” is displayed as the title, and below that, as the specific comprehensive gaming history information, the number of withdrawals within the remaining 10 rotations of ST, , ST pullback rate is displayed.

  In addition, it is good also as displaying the number of possession balls which the player in game possesses on said general game history data screen or individual game history data screen. Moreover, you may make it display the information of the prepaid remaining amount and card remaining amount which a player owns together.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special image screen.
This special image screen shows a state in which an image of a dollar box and a special box corresponding to the number of balls possessed by the player is displayed as a special image. Also, below the special image, the number of balls possessed by the player is displayed in a separate frame. In addition, on the special image screen, in addition to the number of possessed balls, information on a prepaid balance and a card balance owned by the player may be displayed together.

[5. Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment is an embodiment of a gaming system in which the gaming machine according to the present invention is an encapsulated pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as an “encapsulated pachinko machine”) in which a game ball is encapsulated and circulated. is there.

[5-1. Game system configuration]
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a fifth gaming system 1E to which the above-described encapsulating pachinko machine 200B is applied.
In the fifth gaming system 1E, a member player who has a common member card 1000 made up of an IC card, which is a common member recording medium, uses the common member card 1000 to make a plurality of game halls A to C. Member registration can be performed at each store A to C. An amusement hall is synonymous with a store. In addition, since the system configuration | structure of each game hall A-C is the same, the system configuration | structure of this embodiment is demonstrated taking the game hall A as an example.

  The common membership card 1000 is obtained by expanding the membership card managed in units of stores described in the above embodiment to a membership card managed in units of nationwide. That is, in the above embodiment, an individual member card is issued for each store, and the card ID and the member ID are individually assigned to the player who plays in the store, and based on the card ID and the member ID. Thus, the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls, and the like are managed by the management device so that a player can play a game at the store. In the third gaming system 1C, a player who plays in each store in the country issues a common member card 1000 that can be used in all stores at each game hall, and manages the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls in units of nations. Thus, it is possible for players to play games at all stores nationwide. In other words, the third gaming system 1C is an expansion of the first gaming system 1A and the second gaming system 1C, which are store units, on a national basis.

  In the game hall A of the present embodiment, a card unit 300B and a data display device 400 that are installed one-to-one with respect to an encapsulated pachinko machine 200B as a gaming machine arranged side by side on a plurality of gaming islands, Prepaid frequency (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as frequency) recorded in the common membership card 1000, which is a member recording medium used in the card unit 300B, and a game value recorded in a visitor card, which is a prepaid card. A system controller 100 for managing the membership, a member registration machine 10 for performing membership registration using the common membership card 1000, and a storage server 110 for managing the number of stored balls (the number of stored balls included in the member information) of the member player. And the hall computer 801 that performs security management mutually communicate with each other via the communication cable 108. Data are communicably connected. The hall computer 801 is further connected to the key management computer 800.

  The card unit 300B has a card reader for reading stored data such as a (member) card ID and a prepaid frequency stored in a common member card 1000 inserted in a card insertion slot provided on the front face, a game hall member card or a visitor card A writer 327 is built in, and a ball lending process for lending a game ball using a prepaid frequency read by the card reader / writer 327 or a ball stored in the common member card 1000 or the game hall member card, Then, a replay process for paying out at least a part of the stored balls specified by the common member card 1000 or the game hall member card as a game ball is performed.

  Further, from the card unit 300B, various information such as a membership card acceptance notification including a membership card ID indicating that the common membership card 1000 has been inserted into the card unit 300B and game-related information in the corresponding encapsulated pachinko machine 200B. Is transmitted from the system controller 100, and information such as the prepaid frequency remaining in each common member card 1000, each game hall member card, and each visitor card is transmitted.

  In addition, the storage server 110 includes member information related to a member player registered as a member at the game hall (member game-related information generated in the game of the member player, and personal information such as the name and address of the member player). A member management computer 120 that collects and manages (including certain member attribute information) is connected via a communication cable 109 so as to be capable of data communication in both directions.

  Further, the member management computer 120 is connected to the storage compensation server 130 installed in the storage compensation center of an external organization via a dedicated communication line 111 so as to be able to perform two-way data communication. This storage compensation server 130 can communicate with the storage server 110 of the game hall A via the member management computer 120. The member management computer 120 can communicate with each card unit 300 </ b> B, the member registration machine 10, and the system controller 100 via the storage server 110.

  In this embodiment, the member management computer 120 and the storage server 110 are illustrated as separate computers. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the membership management computer 120 and the storage server are not limited thereto. 110 may be formed by a single computer (computer computer).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to enable member registration to be performed at a reception counter described later, a member card ID or a game hall member ID stored in the common member card 1000 is separately provided from the member management computer 120. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the member registration machine 10 and the member management computer 120 are connected to each other. It may be formed by a single computer.

  The storage ball compensation server 130 has the same data as the storage ball (storage ball) number management data of the storage ball server 110 of each game hall, and the storage ball number management data of the storage ball server 110 of each game hall is updated and The storage number management data of the compensation server 130 is also configured, and even if the management data on the number of stored balls at each amusement hall is damaged due to some trouble, the management data on the number of stored balls is compensated as an external organization. The center can compensate.

  Further, the game server A storage server 110 is connected to a management computer 140 installed in a card management company for the common member card 1000 via a dedicated communication line 112 so as to be capable of two-way data communication. The management computer 140 can communicate with the system controller 100 of the game hall A, the member registration machine 10 and the member management computer 120 via the storage server 110. As will be described later, the management computer 140 of the card management company can register and manage information related to member players who have registered as members in each of the game halls A to C.

  The management computer 140 of the card management company includes a communication unit (not shown) connected to the Internet, and is a notebook personal computer 15A or a mobile phone 16A that is an information terminal that can be operated by a member player having a function of connecting to the Internet. To a site computer that can be accessed via the Internet.

  Further, the card unit 300B described above is directly connected to the corresponding enclosing method pachinko machine 200B, and various signals can be transmitted and received between the card unit 300B and the corresponding enclosing method pachinko machine 200B. The number of game balls used in the game of the corresponding encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, the number of balls counted by counting the number of game balls, and the like are transmitted and received.

  Then, game-related information is transmitted to the member management computer 120 based on these inputted signals, so that the member management computer 120 can grasp game-related information in each encapsulated pachinko machine 200B and respond accordingly. The game related information generated during the acceptance of the common member card 1000 in the card unit 300B is managed as a game history which is member game related information generated in the game of the member player.

  In addition, the IC chip included in the common member card 1000 has a member card ID (recording medium identification information) for individually identifying each common member card 1000 and each member player can be individually identified. In addition, a game hall member ID uniquely assigned to each member in each game hall is stored.

  The common member card 1000 stores not only the game hall member ID issued at the game hall A but also the game hall member IDs issued at other game halls B to C. A member player can register as a member in each of the game halls A to C using one common member card 1000. Here, the IC chip included in the game hall membership card stores a game hall member ID uniquely assigned to each member in each game hall so that each member player can be individually identified. The membership card ID (recording medium identification information) is not stored.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the storage area of the IC chip of the common member card 1000.
In the common member card 1000, a storage area for a card management company and a storage area uniquely assigned to each of the game halls A to C are set. Then, as will be described later, the game hall A assigns the game hall member ID that the game hall A uniquely issues to the storage area allocated to the store in the common member card 1000 to the member registration machine 10 and the card unit. Data can be written using a card reader / writer 327 provided in 300B.

  In addition, in the storage area allocated to each game hall A to C in the IC chip of the common member card 1000, unique storage data in each game hall A to C can be stored. In this case, a NULL value indicating empty data such as “0” is stored as initial value storage data. The storage device provided in the storage server 110 stores storage number management data.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the stored ball number management data.
The stored ball number management data stores the number of stored balls, which is counted by the ball counter 40 and made available for the game again, in association with the game club member ID of the member player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the storage device included in the member management computer 120 stores a game hall member information table (see (a)) and a member-specific game history table (see (b)). . The game hall member information table is associated with each game hall member ID that can identify the member player registered as a member in the game hall A, and a personal identification number used for identity verification, and each member player's ID. Member attribute information (member information) including a name (last name and name), gender, age, birthday, occupation, address, and e-mail address is registered.

  In addition, in the member-specific game history table, the game point ID, the number of visits to the store, the number of visits, and the member player insert the common member card 1000 into the card unit 300B in association with each member player's game hall member ID. The game history (member information) of the last 10 times is stored as a game played once until the common member card 1000 is taken out after the game is completed.

  As these game histories, specifically, for each game hall member ID, the visit date, the machine number of the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B that has played the game, the start time of the game (the insertion time of the common member card 1000), the end of the game Time (return time of common member card 1000), game time that is the difference between the start time and end time, the number of starts, the number of bonuses, the number of probable changes, the sales amount that the member player has consumed for the game, the member game Spending amount (minimum number is in units of 100 yen) that is equivalent to the prize provided to the member player by the game hall as a result of the player earning in the game, and the balance amount after deducting the spending amount from these sales amounts , Game hall wins and losses are remembered. The member-specific game history table may be stored only in the member management computer 120, or may be stored in the management computer 140 in association with the member card ID.

  Further, the storage ball server 110 according to the present embodiment makes a request to the member management computer 120 to use the storage ball based on the reception of the storage ball use request transmitted from the card unit 300B based on the replay operation in the card unit 300B. Inquires whether the code number included in the game number matches the code number stored in the game room member information table corresponding to the game field member ID included in the storage ball use request, and the code number matches. In such a case, a storage ball number use permission process for permitting reuse of the stored ball number stored in the stored ball number management data in association with the game hall member ID is performed, and the stored ball number is re-registered in the game. The number of stored balls used is subtracted and updated from the number of stored balls. At this time, the number of stored balls for a predetermined fee may be subtracted and updated.

  Moreover, the storage ball server 110 of this embodiment is memorize | stored in the storage ball number management data corresponding to the game hall member ID transmitted with the said count ball number based on reception of the count ball number transmitted from the card unit 300B. The stored ball number updating process is performed in which the received number of counting balls is added to the number of stored balls and updated. Further, when the storage ball number management data is updated, the storage ball server 110 transmits the storage ball information including the updated new storage ball number and the amusement hall member ID to the storage ball compensation server 130 of the storage ball compensation center. Perform transmission processing.

  Further, the member management computer 120 of the present embodiment, based on the reception of the common member card acceptance notification transmitted from the card unit 300B based on the newly received common member card 1000 in the card unit 300B, The current data in the member-specific game history table corresponding to the amusement hall member ID read from the newly received common member card 1000 included in the common member card acceptance notification is the previous data, and the previous data is the previous data. As described above, the number of times of each game history is updated and storage (update) of the current game history is started to store member game related information generated in the game of the member player, Based on the return operation in the unit 300B, the return notification sent from the card unit 300B In the case that contains the game arcade member ID that started the 憶, exit the store to the current game history (updated), and carries out a process of determining and storing the outcome of the game unit.

  When starting to store (update) the current game history, the member management computer 120 transmits a usage frequency information output request including a game hall member ID corresponding to the game history to be updated to the system controller 100. Thus, when the prepaid frequency is used from the common membership card 1000 in which the game hall member ID included in the transmitted usage frequency information output request is transmitted from the system controller 100, the usage frequency information is transmitted. As a result, the game history is updated and added to the sales amount.

  In addition, the member management computer 120 of the present embodiment displays a member registration screen on the display device of the member registration machine 10 when a predetermined operation for performing new member registration is performed on the member registration machine 10. The member attribute information input process for accepting the input of the member attribute information regarding the member player newly registered as a member is executed, and the unused game hall member ID is selected from the game hall member IDs stored in the game hall member information table. A member attribute information storage process is performed in which the member attribute information that is given to the new member player and is associated with the game hall member ID and received on the member registration screen is stored in the game hall member information table.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the storage device provided in the management computer 140 of the card management company includes a common member information table (see (a)), a registered game hall table (see (b)), and a game hall information table. (See (c)) and a related member information table (see (d)) are stored.

  In the common member information table, each common member card 1000 is associated with each individually identifiable member card ID, a personal identification number used for identity verification, the name (name and name) of each member player, gender , Member attribute information consisting of age, birthday, occupation, address, and e-mail address are registered. In this embodiment, the personal identification number is also managed in the common member information table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these personal identification numbers can be managed individually only at each game hall. The password may be different at each game hall.

  In the registered game hall table, all the game hall IDs (game hall information) of the game hall where the member player specified by the member card ID has registered as a member are stored in association with each member card ID. Yes. The registration of the game hall ID to these registered game hall tables is a member transmitted together with the member attribute information registration request or the member attribute information transmission request from the member registration machine 10 or the member management computer 120 installed in each game hall. When the game hall ID stored in the registered game hall table in association with the card ID does not include the game hall ID of the game hall that has been transmitted, the game hall ID of the game hall is It is registered in the registered game hall table as the game hall where the member player has registered.

  In the game hall information table, the game hall name and location of the game hall are stored in association with the game hall identifier (game hall A, game hall B,...) And the game hall ID of each game hall. Thus, information such as a game hall name and a location of the game hall can be specified from the game hall ID.

  In the related member information table, a related member player (hereinafter also referred to as “friend member”) having a predetermined relationship with a member player identified from the member card ID in association with each member card ID. Everything is remembered. In this embodiment, a friend member is registered in response to the member player specified from the member card ID selecting from other member players.

  Next, processing statuses of the member registration machine 10, the member management computer 120, and the management computer 140 when a new common member card 1000 is issued to accept member registration will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, it is assumed that a player who has not registered a membership in any of the game halls A to C visits the game hall A and performs membership registration for the game hall A. This player has not yet possessed (owned) the common membership card 1000, and when visiting the game hall A, he goes to the reception counter where the member registration machine 10 is installed. Therefore, member attribute information, which is personal information such as name and address, is entered on the member registration application form and handed over to the store clerk. Then, the store clerk who received the application form from the player sets an unused (unissued) common member card 1000 in the card reader / writer 10 ′ of the member registration device 10 and inputs member attribute information to the member registration device 10. To do.

  In this embodiment, the store clerk operates the member registration machine 10 to input member attribute information. However, an input terminal that can be freely operated by a player who visits the game is installed in the game hall. Is configured such that the member registration machine 10 can acquire the member attribute information by transmitting the member attribute information input by the player using the input terminal to the member registration machine 10. It may be.

  Further, the member registration device 10 performs a process of accepting input of member attribute information, and the member card stored in the storage area for the card management company in the IC chip of the common member card 1000 inserted into the card reader / writer 10 ′. ID reading processing is performed. Then, the member registration machine 10 transmits a member attribute information registration request including the read member card ID, the game hall ID of the game hall A and the input member attribute information to the management computer 140 of the card management company. Do.

  Here, the management computer 140 of the card management company refers to the member card ID included in the member attribute information registration request received from the member registration machine 10 of the game hall A, and associates it with the member card ID in the common member information table. A process of registering the name, address, etc. of the member player, which is the member attribute information included in the received member attribute information registration request, is performed in the item such as name, address, etc. Furthermore, the management computer 140 performs a process of registering the game hall ID included in the received member attribute information registration request in the registered game hall table in association with the member card ID.

  Further, the member registration machine 10 performs processing for transmitting the game hall new member information including the member attribute information to the member management computer 120. Here, the member management computer 120 refers to the game hall member information table, determines a predetermined game hall member ID from among unused game hall member IDs, and is associated with the determined game hall member ID. In the items such as name and address, a process of registering the name and address of the member player, which is member attribute information included in the received new amusement hall member information, is performed. Then, a process of transmitting the determined game hall member ID to the member registration machine 10 is performed. The member management computer 120 also transmits the determined game hall member ID to the storage server 110 to register the determined game hall member ID in the storage server 110 and the number of storage balls corresponding to the game hall member ID. Is stored with an initial value of “0”.

  Then, the member registration device 10 performs a process of writing the game hall member ID received from the member management computer 120 into the storage area for the game hall A in the IC chip of the common member card 1000. Then, the store clerk removes the common member card 1000 from the member registration machine 10, hands over the new common member card 1000 to the player, and completes the member registration at the game hall A, so that the common member card 1000 is removed. It can be used at the game hall A.

  Next, the processing status of the member registration machine 10, the member management computer 120, and the management computer 140 when accepting a member registration from a player holding the common member card 1000 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, it is assumed that a player who has already completed membership registration at any of the game halls B to C other than the game hall A comes to the game hall A and performs membership registration for the game hall A. The player goes to the reception counter where the member registration machine 10 is installed in the state of possessing (owning) the common member card 1000 issued at the amusement hall where the member registration has already been performed for the first time. Tell the store clerk that you want to do it, and hand over the common member card 1000 you own to the store clerk. The store clerk inserts the received common member card 1000 into the card reader / writer 10 ′ of the member registration machine 10.

  The member registration machine 10 includes the storage data stored in the storage area for the game hall A and the membership card stored in the storage area for the card management company in the IC chip of the common membership card 1000 inserted in the card reader / writer 10 ′. ID reading processing is performed. Here, in the case where the membership registration has not yet been performed at the game hall A, the above-described NULL value is stored as storage data in the storage area for the game hall A, and the membership registration has already been performed at the game hall A. In this case, the game hall member ID uniquely assigned in the game hall A is stored.

  Further, the member registration device 10 performs processing for transmitting the storage data read from the common member card 1000 to the member management computer 120. The member management computer 120 that has received the stored data of this card refers to the game hall member information table, and whether or not the data read from the storage area for the game hall A of the common member card 1000 is registered as the game hall member ID. The process which determines is performed. Then, the member management computer 120 performs processing for returning the determination result (registration / no registration) to the member registration device 10.

  When the member registration machine 10 that has received the determination result from the member management computer 120 determines that there is a registration based on this determination result (when the stored data is a game hall member ID), the registration device 10 displays that the registration has been completed. To display. In this case, the store clerk removes the common member card 1000 from the member registration machine 10, returns the common member card 1000 to the player, and informs that the member registration in the game hall A has already been completed.

  Further, when the member registration machine 10 that has received the determination result from the member management computer 120 determines that there is no registration based on this determination result (for example, when the stored data is a NULL value), the read member card ID and the game A process of transmitting a member attribute information transmission request including the game hall ID of the field A to the management computer 140 of the card management company is performed.

  Here, the management computer 140 of the card management company collates the member card ID included in the member attribute information transmission request received from the member registration machine 10 of the game hall A, and when the member card ID is registered. The member attribute information such as name and address registered in association with the member card ID in the common member information table is transmitted to the member registration device 10. Further, the management computer 140 performs a process of registering the game hall ID included in the received member attribute information transmission request in the registered game hall table in association with the member card ID.

  On the other hand, when the member card ID is not registered in the common member information table, a member attribute information unregistered notification indicating that the member attribute information is not registered is returned, and the member registration device 10 is returned to the member attribute information. Move to the acceptance state. The flow when the member attribute information is accepted is the same as the flow described above when a new common member card 1000 is issued.

  In addition, the member registration machine 10 that has received the member attribute information from the management computer 140 of the card management company performs a process of transmitting the game hall new member information including the received member attribute information to the member management computer 120. Here, the member management computer 120 refers to the game hall member information table, determines a predetermined game hall member ID from among unused game hall member IDs, and is associated with the determined game hall member ID. A recording medium use registration process for registering the name and address of the member player, which is the member attribute information included in the received new amusement hall member information, in the item such as name and address is performed. Then, a process of transmitting the determined game hall member ID to the member registration machine 10 is performed.

  The member management computer 120 also transmits the determined game hall member ID to the storage server 110 to register the determined game hall member ID in the storage server 110 and the number of storage balls corresponding to the game hall member ID. Is stored with an initial value of “0”.

  Further, the member registration machine 10 performs a process of writing the game hall member ID received from the member management computer 120 into the storage area for the game hall A in the IC chip of the common member card 1000 by the card reader / writer 10 ′. Then, the store clerk removes the common member card 1000 from the card reader / writer 10 ′, hands over the common member card 1000 to the player, and completes member registration in the game hall A.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the member registration is performed at the reception counter even when the common member card 1000 is held. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, As shown in FIG. 65, the member registration may be performed using the common member card 1000 in the card unit 300B. The processing statuses of the card unit 300B, the member management computer 120, and the management computer 140 in this case are shown in FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, it is assumed that a player who has already completed membership registration at one of the game halls B to C other than the game hall A has visited the game hall A. This player inserts the common member card 1000 issued at the game hall where the member registration has already been performed first into the card unit 300B.

  Then, the card unit 300B uses the card reader / writer to store the stored data stored in the storage area for the game hall A in the IC chip of the inserted common member card 1000 and the member card ID stored in the storage area for the card management company. Read processing is performed by reading 3 ′. Here, in the case where the membership registration has not yet been performed at the game hall A, the above-described NULL value is stored as storage data in the storage area for the game hall A, and the membership registration has already been performed at the game hall A. In this case, the game hall member ID uniquely assigned in the game hall A is stored.

  Further, the card unit 300 </ b> B performs processing for transmitting the storage data read from the common member card 1000 to the member management computer 120. The member management computer 120 that has received the stored data of this card refers to the game hall member information table, and whether or not the data read from the storage area for the game hall A of the common member card 1000 is registered as the game hall member ID. The process which determines is performed. Then, the member management computer 120 performs a process of returning the determination result (registration / no registration) to the card unit 300B.

  When the card unit 300B receives the determination result from the member management computer 120 and determines that there is a registration based on this determination result (when the stored data is a game hall member ID), the card unit 300B sends the above-described storage ball use request to the storage server. 110, so that the card unit 300B can use the stored balls.

  In addition, when the card unit 300B that has received the determination result from the member management computer 120 determines that there is no registration based on this determination result (when the stored data is a NULL value, etc.), the card unit 300B is displayed on the display device included in the card unit 300B. A message such as "You are not registered as a member at our store. Do you want to register as a member at our store?" Is displayed, and whether or not you want to register as a member of the playground A to the player. Perform the inquiry process.

  Here, when the player selects not to register as a member, a card return process for discharging the common member card 1000 from the card unit 300B is performed. Further, when the player selects to register as a member, a process for transmitting a member registration request including the read member card ID to the member management computer 120 is performed.

  As described above, in the gaming system of the present embodiment, when the player who owns the common member card 1000 becomes a new member in the game hall A that is not a member, the management computer 140 of the card management company Since the managed member attribute information of the player is acquired based on the member card ID recorded in the common member card 1000 and registered as member information, the member attribute information is newly registered as a member. It is possible to remarkably save the player's troubles such as filling in and entering the information, and the membership registration is greatly simplified, and it is not necessary to carry multiple membership cards. It is possible to promote membership in other amusement halls of players who have already registered as members.

  In addition, the player can become a member upon receiving a new issuance of the common member card 1000 at any one of the game halls where the member registration machines 10 are installed, and the member attribute information of the member can be used as a card. The management computer 140 of the management company can be quickly managed.

  Further, when the member registration machine 10 or the card unit 300B receives the common member card 1000, whether or not the member management computer 120 refers to the game hall member information table and the stored data of the card is registered as the game hall member ID. By determining whether or not it is determined that the player is a member of the playground A, the member card ID is transmitted to the management computer 140 of the card management company, and the member attribute information is wasted. Therefore, the communication load between the member management computer 120 and the management computer 140 can be reduced, and the processing load on the management computer 140 can also be reduced.

[5-2. Configuration of encapsulated pachinko machine]
FIG. 66 is a front view showing an example of an external configuration of an encapsulating pachinko machine 200B according to the present embodiment.
The enclosing method pachinko machine 200B encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the launch motor is driven to play the enclosing balls one by one. It is configured so that it can be played by being driven into the game area 27 on the front side. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand. The contact motor is detected by the touch sensor, and the firing motor is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The encapsulated pachinko machine 200B is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27. In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274 and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) unfavorable for the player. .

  The variable display device 278 includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls won in each start winning opening 275, 276, 277. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit gaming state is entered and the big prize opening 271 is opened.

  In addition, the display result of the variable display device 278 becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (a slotted pattern). A state occurs, and a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the big hit is improved after the end of the big hit gaming state is generated.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27 are won in any of the winning openings or are collected in the out opening 154 without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the enclosing-type pachinko machine 200B. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  A display 54 is provided below the game area 27 in the enclosing method pachinko machine 200B. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the display of the holding points, the remaining card amount, or the variable display device 278 to the player.

  The display 54 may be configured to be attached to the encapsulating pachinko machine 200B independently of the card unit 300B, or may be formed integrally with the card unit 300B and fitted to the front surface of the encapsulating pachinko machine 200B.

  Further, a counting button 28 for counting the game balls to the holding balls is provided on the left side of the hitting operation handle 25 in the enclosing method pachinko machine 200B. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28 is kept pressed.

  It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or the counting button 28 is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time).

  Thus, since the counting button 28 is provided on the enclosing method pachinko machine 200B side, the player sitting facing the enclosing method pachinko machine 200B as compared with the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the card unit 300B side. Operability can be improved.

  A game ball number display 29 for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28. The game ball number display 29 is a 7-segment display. The game ball number display 29 may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  The encapsulated pachinko machine 200B according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26 and other game frames (front frames) 21. In particular, the game board 26 is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the game frame 21 is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, it is sufficient for the game store to replace only the game board 26 when replacing a new stand.

[5-3. Card unit configuration]
66 and 67 are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the card unit 300B in the present embodiment.
The card unit 300B includes a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A game club membership card, which is a game recording medium that can be used for storage balls and balances that are issued only for game halls that have been registered as members and can be used in common by multiple game halls. A common member card 1000 that is a game recording medium issued to member players who have registered as members is accepted. The visitor card, the game hall member card, and the common member card 1000 are composed of IC cards.

  The card unit 300B that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of balls, etc.) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. Have The encapsulated pachinko machine 200B allows a ball game equivalent to the number of balls specified by the game ball data. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the card unit 300B, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a projecting portion 305 projecting forward from the front of the device, a common member card 1000, a game hall member card or a visitor card are inserted. A card insertion / discharge port 309 and the like are provided. The common member card 1000, the game hall member card, or the visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327, and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305 described above, a display 312 is provided on the surface facing the player. The card unit 300B of this embodiment is not provided with a mechanical replay button, and the replay button is displayed on the display 54 or the display 312 and displayed on the touch panel of the display 54 or the display 312. An operation on the replay button is detected. When the common member card 1000 or the game hall member card is received, the replay button is a member card ID recorded on the common member card 1000 or the game hall member card, or a game hall member ID (simply card ID, C -It is also a button for executing a replay game using the number of balls specified by the member card ID or the game hall member ID.

  The display 312 displays the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card) (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  In the display 312, as in the first embodiment, a remaining amount extraction icon for performing a remaining amount extraction operation, a small amount lending icon for performing a small amount lending operation, a holding ball division icon for performing a ball separation, and a card A post-card insertion icon for performing a post-insertion operation, a card lock icon for performing a card lock operation, an information inquiry icon for performing an information inquiry operation, etc. are displayed. Various processes such as a take-out process, a small amount lending process, a ball splitting process, a post-card insertion process, a card lock process, and an information inquiry process are executed.

  When the replay button is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls, and based on the converted game balls Thus, it is possible to play a game using the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a common membership card 1000 or amusement hall membership card and the number of possessions is not recorded and the accumulated balls are recorded in the hall management computer or the like, a part of the accumulated balls is It is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and a game can be played by the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. The conversion of the holding balls and the storage balls into game balls corresponds to a use process for using the game value owned by the player for a game in the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, and the control unit 305 corresponds to a use processing means. . In addition, apart from the replay button, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the ball may be provided, and the replay button may be a button dedicated to saving the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the accumulated ball data is not recorded directly on the common member card 1000 or the game hall member card, but is associated with the common member card number or the game hall member card number on a computer installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer. It is configured to be stored and to search for a corresponding stored ball based on the common member card number or the amusement hall member card number. That is, the stored ball data is transmitted from the card unit 300B to the computer, and the stored ball data is managed by the computer. On the other hand, the possession ball is recorded as possession data directly on the card by the card unit 300B.

  As described above, the processing in which the card unit 300B transmits the stored ball data to the computer and returns the card, and the processing in which the card unit 300B records the possessed ball data on the card and returns the card have not been used. This corresponds to a determination process for determining the game value, and the control unit 305 corresponds to a determination processing means.

  Note that the management method of the stored ball data and the possessed ball data is not limited to the above, and both may be stored in the hall computer 801 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the holding ball may be stored in the hall computer 801 in association with the card number. When the hall computer 801 stores the data corresponding to the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall computer 801 is written on the card (common membership card 1000, game hall membership card, visitor card) and discharged. May be. The prepaid balance is directly written on a card (common member card 1000, game hall member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  In addition, the timing of storing the holding ball in the card (common member card 1000, game hall member card, visitor card) or the hall computer is stored in real time every time the counting button 28 is operated and the counting process is performed, for example. It is conceivable that the timing is such that the data is stored at regular intervals, or is stored collectively when the card is returned.

  Further, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the card unit 300B, the possession ball stored in the card unit 300B is temporarily stored in the hall computer 801 as a stored ball, and the player returns the card. When the card is inserted into the same or another card unit 300B again on the same day as the date of receiving the card, only the possession balls for the day once stored as the accumulated balls are stored again in the card unit 300B, and the range of the possession balls The game balls may be added to allow the game to be played. This addition of game balls corresponds to a use process for causing a game value owned by a player to be used for a game on a gaming machine.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320 and a camera 399 are further provided on the front side of the card unit 300B. The IR photosensitive unit 320 receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a game attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs it. The camera 399 captures the player's face image and outputs it to the control unit 305.

  In the present embodiment, like the above-described replay button, the mechanical ball lending (ball lending) button and the card return button are not provided, and the ball lending button and the card return button are provided on the display 54 or the display 312. The operation of the displayed ball lending button and the card return button is detected by the touch panel of the display 54 or the display 312.

The ball lending button is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B.
The card return button is operated when the player finishes the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of possessed balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + counting operation) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by.

  Also in the fifth game system 1E, as in the first game system 1A to the fourth game system 1D in the first to fourth embodiments described above, information display of the data display device 400, the card unit 300B, and the like is displayed. Based on the game signal output from the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, the device can acquire general game history information (common general game history information, specific general game history information) and personal game history information (common personal game history information, specific personal game). History information), and the aggregated data can be output to a player terminal such as a mobile phone 16A or a notebook computer 15A which is a player terminal possessed by a member player.

  Further, in the fifth gaming system 1E, comprehensive game history information and personal game history information can be managed in a comprehensive manner for a wide-area store. That is, in the fifth gaming system 1E, serial number IDs are assigned to all gaming machines installed in a wide-area store, and the management device manages gaming history information of all gaming machines installed in each store. Can do.

  Here, the “wide area” can be, for example, a predetermined area (for example, an area by prefecture) or the whole country. In this case, a gaming system in which the hall computer 600 installed in one store displays information related to the game in the gaming machine installed in another store on the gaming device installed in the own store. It is possible to build Thereby, for example, in the third gaming system 1C, the game information of the own store and the game information of the other store can be displayed on the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400 in this case.
In the second display section 440, for "Pachinko XXX" which is the model of the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B, the average number of hits of our store, which is the average number of big hits of our own store, and the average number of big hits of the store A which is another store, respectively It is displayed. Further, since the average number of jackpots of the store is larger than that of the store A, the message “Our store has more jackpots!” Is displayed. By performing such display, the surrounding players can know the number of jackpots of the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B of the other store, in addition to the number of jackpots of the encapsulated pachinko machine 200B of the store, and at which store It is possible to grasp whether it is advantageous to play a game.

[6. Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment is an embodiment relating to a sixth gaming system 1F including elements that can be added incidentally to the first gaming system 1A to the fifth gaming system 1E described in the above embodiment.

  In the sixth gaming system 1F, the pachinko machine 200 (200A, 200B) in which the player has played is displayed on the second display portion 440 of the data display device 400 in the above embodiment, and (1) the only player has played the only game. A gaming machine, (2) a long gaming machine in which the player's gaming time is longer than the first predetermined time, (3) a first gaming machine in which the player first played, (4) a gaming time of the second player This is an embodiment in which information about the total result of which one of the one or more game models of a short game model shorter than the predetermined time is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400 displays the number and / or percentage of game balls that have passed through the first area of the game area in the game on the pachinko machine 200, and the game balls. This is an embodiment in which information on the total result obtained by counting the number of times and / or the ratio of passing through the second area of the game area according to the launch intensity of the game balls is displayed.

  The processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 determines the game model that the player has played based on the card information recorded on the membership card inserted in the card unit 300 provided in the pachinko machine 200. Although illustration is omitted, in the card information, the game time of the player in the pachinko machine 200 is recorded for each ID of the pachinko machine 200 in association with the member ID. The game time includes a game start time when a game on the pachinko machine 200 is started and a game end time when a game on the pachinko machine 200 is ended. Based on these game times, the processing unit 410 determines which of the above game models (1) to (4) the game model played by the player is.

  An example of a game model determination method will be described. If there is only one pachinko machine 200 in which the member with the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 200 with that machine number is determined to be the only gaming machine. Among the pachinko machines 200 in which the member of the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 200 having a machine number that is longer than the first predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) is calculated as the time from the game start time to the game end time. Judged as a long-running game model. Among the pachinko machines 200 in which the member of the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 200 having a number shorter than the second predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes) is calculated as the time from the game start time to the game end time. It is determined as a short-time gaming machine. Further, among the pachinko machines 200 in which the member with the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 200 having the oldest game start time is determined as the first game model.

  Based on the game model determination result, the processing unit 410 tabulates which game model the game model played by the player is, and stores the tabulation result in a database. Then, the processing unit 410 graphs, for example, the game models so that surrounding players can easily see the game models based on the total results of the game models stored in the database, and displays the created graph on the second display unit 440. To control.

FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400 in this case.
In FIG. 69 (1), the second display unit 440 displays a pie chart (the model-specific long-time game model ratio pie chart) that indicates the percentage that the pachinko machine 200 has been played by the player as a long-time game model. . FIG. 69 (2) is a bar graph instead of the pie chart showing the percentage that the pachinko machine 200 has been played by the player as a long-time game model (model-specific long-time game model ratio bar graph). A long-running game model ratio bar graph is displayed on the second display unit 440. By performing the graph display as described above on the second display unit 440, the surrounding players can know the proportion of games played for a long time on the pachinko machine 200.

  The above is an example of the display screen of the pie chart and bar graph created for the long-time gaming machine, but instead of this, the pie chart and bar graph created for the only gaming machine, the first gaming machine, and the short-time gaming machine are the first. You may make it display on 2 display part 440. FIG. By performing such a display, the surrounding players can know the rate at which the game, the first game, and the short-time game are performed only on the pachinko machine 200. It can be seen that the pachinko machine 200 with a high percentage of games for a long time is a popular model, and the only pachinko machine 200 with a high percentage of games is a very popular model. It can also be seen that the pachinko machine 200 with a high percentage of short-time games is a less popular model. Thereby, the surrounding player can judge a popular game model and a non-popular game model, and can refer to it when selecting the model to play.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440.
In FIG. 70 (1), for the model A of the pachinko machine 200, a pie chart showing the determination result of the game model that the player played is displayed on the second display unit 440. Specifically, for model A, the ratio of the player playing the first game, the ratio of playing for a short time, the ratio of playing for a long time, and the ratio of playing a single game are shown in a pie chart format.

This is shown in a bar graph form in FIG. 70 (2). For model A, the proportion of players who played the game for the first time, the proportion of players who played games for a short time, the proportion of players who played games for a long time, and the proportion of players who played games only. It is displayed on the second display unit 440 in a bar graph format.
By performing such display, the surrounding players can know the percentage of the pachinko machine 200 played as the only game model, long-time game model, first game model, and short-time game model. It can be determined whether the machine 200 is a popular model or an unpopular model.

  In the present embodiment, the launching device provided in the pachinko machine 200 includes a launching intensity sensor that detects the launching intensity of the game ball, and the launching intensity sensor detects the launching intensity of the gameball that is launched from the launching apparatus. To do. Then, a firing intensity signal indicating the detected firing intensity is output to the data display device 400. In addition, the pachinko machine 200 indicates that the game ball has passed through the prize opening when the game ball driven into the game area passes through each prize opening (normal prize opening, start prize opening, and big prize opening). The area signal is output to the data display device 400. At this time, the pachinko machine 200 outputs the game field launch intensity in association with the passing area signal.

  The data display device 400 determines the launch intensity and the pass area of the game ball based on the launch intensity signal and the pass area signal output from the pachinko machine 200. Based on the determination result, the number and / or ratio of the game balls passing through the first area of the game area, and the number and / or ratio of the game balls passing through the second area of the game area, For each game ball launch intensity. Here, in the first area and the second area, various winning holes (ordinary winning opening, starting winning opening, large winning opening) where game balls are awarded, and divided driving areas (right hitting) in the gaming area are included. Area, left-handed area, and inset area).

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of a firing strength threshold range table used by the processing unit 410 to determine in which placement area a game ball has been placed according to the firing strength.
In the firing strength threshold range table, a driving area and a firing strength threshold range are stored in association with each other. The driving area is divided into, for example, a “right hitting area”, a “left hitting area”, and a “bumping area”. Here, the “right hit area” is an area on the right side of the game area, and the “left hit area” is an area on the left side of the game area. Further, the “bumping area” is an area in which a game ball is likely to flow toward the start winning opening when a game ball is driven into this area.

  The firing intensity threshold range includes a firing intensity threshold range AR (lower limit value ARlow to upper limit value ARhi) for the right strike area, and a firing intensity threshold range AL (lower limit value ALlow to upper limit value ALhi) for the left strike area. The firing intensity threshold range AB (lower limit value ABlow to upper limit value ABhi) is defined for each of the bump regions.

  The processing unit 410 counts the total number of shots and the total shot ratio based on the launch intensity signal output from the pachinko machine 200. In addition, by determining which launch intensity threshold range of the launch intensity threshold range table the launch intensity specified from the launch intensity signal is included, the game ball placing area is determined. Then, based on the determination result, the total number of driving and the total driving ratio are tabulated for each driving area.

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of a data configuration of the passage area data classified by the firing intensity collected by the processing unit 410.
The passing area data by firing strength is data of the result of counting the passing areas of game balls by firing strength, and the pachinko machine ID is associated with the passing area of game balls, the total number of passes, and the number of passes by launch strength. The number-of-passage data by firing intensity and the passing ratio data by firing strength in which the passing area of game balls, the total passage ratio, and the passage ratio by firing strength are associated with each other are stored.

  In the passage area, a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, a third starting winning port, a first normal winning port, a second normal winning port, a third normal winning port and a large winning port are defined. In addition, the big prize opening includes a probability variation prize opening. Based on the launch intensity signal and the passage area signal output from the pachinko machine 200 for each prize opening, the total number of passages by passage area, the number of passages by launch intensity, the total passage ratio and the passage ratio by launch intensity are tabulated. It memorize | stores in the passage area data according to firing intensity.

  In the present embodiment, for each pachinko machine 200, both the number of passages by launch intensity and the passage ratio by launch intensity are counted. However, only one of them may be counted. Good. That is, only the number of passages by firing intensity may be counted, or only the passage ratio by firing strength may be counted.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the shot area-specific driving area data tabulated by the processing unit 410.
The shot area by launch strength data is the data of the results of the game balls placed by launch strength. The pachinko machine ID, the game ball placement area, the total number of shots and the number of shots by launch strength. And the number-of-shots-by-launch data according to the firing strength, and the driving-in-placement data according to the firing-intensity by associating the game-ball driving area, the total driving-in ratio, and the driving-intensity-by-launching ratio.

  The driving area includes the right hit area, the left hit area, and the hit area described above. For each driving area, the processing unit 410 counts the total driving number and the total driving ratio based on the launch intensity signal output from the pachinko machine 200. In addition, by determining which launch intensity threshold range of the launch intensity threshold range table the launch intensity specified from the launch intensity signal is determined, the game ball placing area is determined, and the determination result is Based on the driving area, the number of driving shots by firing strength and the driving rate by shooting strength are tabulated.

  In the present embodiment, for each pachinko machine 200, it will be described that both the number of shots by firing strength and the shot ratio by firing strength are tabulated, but only one of these is tabulated. May be. That is, only the number of shots by firing strength may be counted, or only the shot ratio by firing strength may be tabulated.

  For example, the processing unit 410 may make it easier for the surrounding players to visually recognize the passing area according to the firing strength of the game balls based on the result of counting the passing areas according to the firing strength (including the driving area). A control is performed to graph and display the created graph on the second display unit 440.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400 in this case.
In FIG. 74 (1), a pie chart showing the percentage of winning to the start winning opening for each firing intensity is displayed on the second display unit 440. Specifically, the ratio indicating the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is represented by the firing strength “T0 to T9” to the firing strength “T90 to T99”.

  This is shown in a bar graph format in FIG. 74 (2), and a bar graph indicating the rate of winning at the start winning opening for each firing intensity is displayed on the second display unit 440. By displaying in this way, players other than the player tend to pass through which area the game balls pass according to the firing strength, and how much handle operation is performed, the game balls are awarded to the start winning opening. It is possible to grasp what can be done.

  In addition, you may make it display on the 2nd display part 440 in the form of a graph the information regarding the number and ratio of the game ball which won not the start winning opening but the normal winning opening according to firing strength. In addition, information regarding the game balls and ratios won in the big winning opening and the probability changing winning opening for each firing intensity may be displayed on the second display unit 440 in a graph format. Thereby, the surrounding game players can grasp how much the handle operation is performed to allow the game balls to be awarded to the normal winning opening, the large winning opening, and the probability changing winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 has been described as counting game models. However, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 may perform counting of game models. In this case, the hall computer 600 may store the tabulation results in a database, and transmit the tabulation result data stored in the database to the data display device 400. Further, the card management computer 7 and the ball management computer 800 may total the game models. In addition, a member management computer for managing member information may be installed in the store, and the member management computer may count game machines.

  In addition, a management computer having two or more functions among the hall computer 600, the card management computer 7, the ball management computer 800, and the member management computer may count the game models.

  The same applies to the aggregation of the passage areas according to the firing intensities. The processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 does not perform the aggregation of the passage areas according to the firing intensities. Areas may be aggregated. In this case, the pachinko machine 200 may output the above-described launch intensity signal and passage region signal to various management computers.

[7. Other Embodiments]
Embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. In addition, about the same structure as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

[7-1. Game machine]
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as a conventional pachinko machine 200A or an encapsulated pachinko machine 200B. However, instead of this, a slot machine that can be played using a game medal as a game medium may be used as a gaming machine according to the present invention.

  In the slot machine, as advantageous states advantageous to the player, bonus (RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus)) state and chance time (ART (assist replay time), AT (assist time) and RT (replay time) ) It is controlled to a state where a privilege for the player such as a state is given. For this reason, the same process as in the above-described embodiment may be performed with the state controlled to at least one of the bonus state and the chance time state as the advantageous state.

  In this case, the information display device may sum up information such as the number of bonus occurrences and the number of chance time occurrences as common game history information. Further, the information display device may add the game history information unique to the slot machine according to the model and type of the slot machine as the unique game history information. Specific game history information includes information such as the number of rushes, rush rate, average rush rate, etc. of bonus types (RB, BB), chance times (ART, RT, AT) according to the model and type of the corresponding slot machine It is only necessary to tabulate.

  Further, the card unit 300 is provided with a medal counting payout unit that counts and pays out the number of medals possessed by the player, and counts the number of locally counted medals based on the counting result of the medal counting payout unit. You can do it. Further, the data display device 400 described in the second embodiment specifies the number of IN medals and the number of OUT medals based on the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal that are game signals output from the slot machine. The local count medal number may be specified based on the OUT medal number.

  Further, if a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 of the card unit 300, the number of local count medals of the player is determined based on the medal count result by the count payout unit 380 provided in the card unit 300. Based on the number of locally counted medals, display control and non-display control of a predetermined image may be performed.

  Further, if a special image is to be displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400, the card unit 300 is configured to output the player's local count medal number to the data display device 400. The processing unit 410 may perform display control and non-display control of a predetermined image based on the local count medal number output from the card unit 300.

  In this case, the first predetermined image can be a dollar box for a game medal into which a game medal acquired by the player is inserted, or can be a bulk of game medals loaded in one box. In addition, the second predetermined image can be a special box for game medals into which game medals acquired by the player are inserted, or the bulk of game medals loaded in another box.

  The first display threshold (first value) for displaying the first predetermined image and the first non-display threshold (second value) for non-displaying the first predetermined image are within a predetermined time range. The number of medals possessed can be determined based on the number. Specifically, when the number of game medals to be paid back to the player by one payout operation is 50, for example, 75 of which 50 has a margin of 25 is displayed as the first display threshold and the first display. The difference (first predetermined number) from the non-threshold value is used. For example, the first display threshold is set to 200, and the first non-display threshold is set to 125.

  Further, the second display threshold value is larger than the first display threshold value, and the difference (second predetermined number) between the second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value is larger than the first predetermined number. A display threshold value and a second non-display threshold value are determined. For example, the second predetermined number is 150, the second display threshold is 1000, and the second non-display threshold is 850.

  When the gaming machine is a slot machine, the display contents of the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400 include the model name of the slot machine, the start count, the bonus occurrence count (RB occurrence count, BB occurrence count), A game history data screen including information such as the number of bonus grants such as the chance time grant count (ART grant count, AT grant count, RT grant count), start history graph, etc., difference medal graph screen showing difference medals, possessed medal count A possessed medal special image screen displayed by a predetermined image may be determined.

  Further, instead of the slot machine, a game point type slot machine that performs a game by a game point method may be used as the gaming machine according to the present invention. In the conventional slot machine, a medal is paid out from a medal payout slot when a medal is inserted from a medal insertion part and a winning combination is established (or when a settlement switch is operated and credits are returned). However, the gaming point type slot machine is a slot machine capable of playing a game without requiring insertion of medals from outside the gaming machine or paying out medals to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In such a game point type slot machine, the prepaid value is converted into “game points” by the corresponding card unit 300 and used in the game. The “game point” corresponds to the “number of game balls” in the enclosing method pachinko machine 200B. That is, the valuable value owned by the player is converted into a game value usable for the game. For example, the prepaid value for 1000 yen can be converted into 50 game points (game point 1 corresponds to one medal).

  In such a game point system slot machine, the number of bets is set using game points. When setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, when operating the one-sheet BET switch and setting the maximum number of bets determined according to the gaming state Operates the MAXBET switch. The rotation start of each reel according to the operation of the start switch and the rotation stop of each reel according to the operation of each stop button are the same as in the above-described medal insertion type slot machine.

  Here, when the start switch is operated, the game point corresponding to the set bet number becomes the subtraction point, and the subtraction point is added to the value of the subtraction counter stored in the RAM of the game control board. When all the reels are stopped, one game is finished, and when a predetermined symbol combination on the activated pay line is stopped as a display result of each reel, a winning occurs, The game points determined according to the winnings are added points, and the added points are added to the value of the addition counter stored in the RAM of the game control board.

  In addition, in the game control board, when the value of the subtraction counter or the value of the addition counter is updated, the value of the subtraction counter after updating (number of subtraction points) or the value of the addition counter after updating (addition) Point). Then, the game control board subtracts the value of the updated subtraction counter from the stored “game point” and clears the value of the subtraction counter to zero. Also, the updated addition counter value is added to the stored “game point”, and the addition counter value is cleared to zero.

  On the other hand, when the card unit 300 receives the value of the subtraction counter (the number of subtraction points), the card unit 300 cumulatively adds the received subtraction point value to the total subtraction point value stored in the RAM, and the subtraction received from the stored “game point”. Subtract points. When the value of the addition counter (addition points) is received, the received addition points are added to the total addition points stored in the RAM, and the received addition balls are added to the stored “game points”. .

  Further, the card unit 300 communicates with the hall computer 600 at a predetermined timing (for example, every time the total addition points and the total subtraction points are updated), and manages the game points by using the total addition points and the total subtraction points. Send to game point management computer. The gaming point management computer updates the “safe number” in the gaming data table based on the total number of points received from the card unit 300 via the hall computer 600 and the total subtraction received from the card unit 300 via the hall computer 600. Based on the score, the “out number” in the game data table is updated.

[7-2. Information display device]
In the above embodiment, the information display device according to the present invention has been described as the card unit 300 or the data display device 400, but the information display device according to the present invention is not limited to these. For example, the calling lamp device 9 may be the information display device according to the present invention, and the inter-counter counting unit including the display unit may be the information display device according to the present invention.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a two-dimensional code is displayed as a code on the display unit 930 of the calling lamp device 9. In the two-dimensional code, common personal game history information itself, specific personal game history information itself, information stored in the external server 700 is used as information that can specify the common personal game history and the specific personal game history as in the embodiment described above. URL information for access can be decoded. The cellular phone 16A reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the display unit 930 of the calling lamp device 9, and decodes and acquires specific information from the two-dimensional code.

  Also, instead of the CR unit (card unit 300) provided corresponding to the CR type gaming machine as described in the above embodiment, a cash machine sand is attached beside the CR unit, However, the double sand configured to be able to play a game with cash may be used as the information display device according to the present invention.

  Further, instead of displaying a special image screen on the liquid crystal display 313 of the card unit 300 or the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400, each of the pachinko machines 200 provided in the lower part of the pachinko machine 200 is displayed. A display unit may be configured in front of the counter and the display screen may be displayed on the display unit.

  In the above embodiment, the touch panel 421 is provided on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400, and the player calls the store clerk or selects a menu by tapping the screen with a finger. However, instead of the touch panel 421, a call button or a menu selection button may be provided on the housing, and the player may call the store clerk or select a menu by pressing the call button or the menu selection button.

  In the above embodiment, the second display unit 440 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the first display unit 430. However, the second display unit 440 may be provided on only one of the left and right sides. . Further, the second display portion 440 may be provided on the side surface of the base portion 4A instead of being provided so as to protrude from the base portion 4A toward the passage. Also in this case, the second display unit 440 may be provided on both the left and right side surfaces, or the second display unit 440 may be provided only on one of the left and right side surfaces.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, the angle of the 2nd display part 440 is changed relatively with respect to the 1st display part 430 by rotating the door part 4B by the hinge part 4C. However, it is also possible to adopt a fixed configuration in which the angle of the second display unit 440 does not change relative to the first display unit 430. In this case, the base portion 4A and the sub base portion are arranged so that the member forming the second display portion 440 (hereinafter referred to as “sub base portion”) has a predetermined opening angle with respect to the base portion 4A. What is necessary is just to comprise integrally.

  Specifically, the opening angle in a state where the base portion 4A and the sub base portion overlap with each other is set to 0 °, and the sub base portion is opened like a door from this state (by rotating with one end of the base portion 4A as a reference). ), When the opening angle in a state in which the sub-base portion is perpendicular to the base portion 4A is defined as 90 °, the setting angle of the sub-base portion is, for example, set within an angle range of 60 ° to 90 ° It can be an angle. If the installation angle is included in this angle range, the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the game position of the player who plays with the gaming machine, but the surrounding players from the end of the game island can see the second display unit. 440 can be visually recognized.

  In addition to the above, the second display unit 440 may be arranged on the main body side surface (both left and right side surfaces or one of the left and right side surfaces) of the data display device 400. That is, instead of providing the sub base portion so as to protrude from the base portion 4A toward the passage, the sub base portion may be provided on the side surface of the base portion 4A.

  In the first embodiment, the special image display is described as being displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 400. However, the special image display is not performed on the second display unit 440 but the first display unit 430. May be displayed.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a special image screen displayed on the second display unit 440 in this case. This figure shows an example of a special image screen when a dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as the second predetermined image. Note that the display method of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image is the same as the display method described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  Note that the special image display is not displayed on one of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400, but both the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 are displayed. A special image display may be displayed on the display unit.

  In addition, the second display unit 440 is not necessarily a display that displays information using characters or numbers, and may be an LED lamp that notifies the player of information by light emission. Specifically, for example, a sub-base portion in which circular or polygonal (triangle, quadrangle, hexagonal, etc.) LED lamps are formed is provided on the side surface of the data display device 400 (both left and right sides or one of the right and left sides) Thus, a side lamp can be configured. Moreover, it is good also as providing an LED lamp in the form which protrudes from the base | substrate part 4A to the channel | path side using a bridge | bridging. In this case, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 causes the LED lamp to emit information such as the big hit of the pachinko machine 200, the probability change, the latent probability change, the time shortage, and the vacant stand in different emission colors and emission patterns. It may be controlled to.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of a light emission setting table that is a table related to the light emission setting of the LED lamp in this case.
This light emission setting table can be stored in advance in the memory (storage device) of the hall computer 600. Then, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 performs settings related to light emission of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400 based on the light emission setting table.

  In the light emission setting table, the type, the number, and the light emission setting of the LED lamp are stored in association with each other. In the light emission setting of the LED lamp, notification contents, a light emission color, and a light emission pattern are determined. The notification contents are contents to be notified to the player by the emission color and the emission pattern.

  For example, in “empty base information” indicating that the pachinko machine 200 is an empty base, “blue” is set as the emission color and “lighting” is set as the emission pattern. In other words, when the pachinko machine 200 is empty, the LED lamp is controlled to turn on in blue.

  In the “hit information” indicating that the pachinko machine 200 is in a big hit, “red” is set as the emission color and “flashing at a time interval of α seconds” is set as the emission pattern. In other words, when the pachinko machine 200 is empty, the LED lamp is controlled to blink in red.

  In the “latency probability change information” indicating that the pachinko machine 200 is changing the latency probability, “green” is defined as the emission color and “flashing at a time interval of β seconds” is defined as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 200 is changing the latent probability, the LED lamp is controlled to turn on in green.

  In the “latency probability change information” indicating that the pachinko machine 200 is changing the latent probability, “yellow” is set as the emission color and “flashing at a time interval of γ seconds” is set as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 200 is running short, the LED lamp is controlled to turn on yellow.

  The correspondence relationship between the notification content related to the light emission setting of the LED lamp, the light emission color, and the light emission pattern is merely an example, and the design can be changed as appropriate. The time interval of blinking of the LED lamp (for example, the above-described α second, β second, and γ second) can be set as appropriate. Further, instead of causing the LED lamp to emit light with a fixed emission color, information may be transmitted to surrounding players by illumination combining various emission colors.

  In the data display device 400, the signal that can specify the number of game media to be transmitted transmitted from the card unit 300 to the data display device 400 includes a signal indicating the number of local counting balls of the player and the number of local counting medals of the player. It is not necessarily limited to the signal which shows. Instead of these signals, a signal indicating the increase / decrease number of game media (game balls or game medals) (hereinafter referred to as “game media increase / decrease signal”) may be transmitted to the data display device 400. In this case, the data display device 400 determines the number of game media to be granted by updating the player's local count ball count and local count medal count based on the game media increase / decrease signal transmitted from the card unit 300. What should I do?

  The timing for outputting the signal that can specify the number of possessed game media is the timing for each predetermined time interval, the timing when the counting result of the counting payout unit 380 reaches the predetermined number, and the count of the counting payout unit 380. The count is determined when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the end, and an intermittent timing such as a timing for waiting for the determination may be used. The design of the timing at which the signal is output can be appropriately changed. .

  Further, regarding the display contents of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 400, the first display unit 430 displays information according to the type of the pachinko machine 200, and the second display unit 440 displays the information. Information that does not depend on the type of the pachinko machine 200 may be displayed. Information that does not depend on the type of the pachinko machine 200 includes information that does not directly depend on the specifications of the pachinko machine 200, such as a big hit, during a probable change, in a vacant stand, the number of revolutions, the number of winnings, and the like. The first display unit 430 is controlled so as to display information depending on the type of the pachinko machine 200, such as latent probability variation information, time reduction information, suddenness information, and small hits information, and the second display unit 440 has a big hit. Control may be performed so as to display information that does not directly depend on the specifications of the pachinko machine, such as probability change, vacant stand, number of revolutions, number of winnings, etc.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the data display device 400 receives the simultaneous effect display instruction signal from the hall computer 600, the simultaneous effect display is described. However, simultaneous presentation display may be performed based on the time measured by the clock unit 465 included in the data display device 400. In this case, the RTC included in the pachinko machine 200 and the clock unit 465 included in the data display device 400 may be synchronized so that the simultaneous effect display is performed at the same timing as the pachinko machine 200 performs the simultaneous effect. .

  In the jackpot running effect, the hall computer 600 has been described as performing the jackpot running effect by transmitting a display instruction signal for the jackpot running effect to each data display device 400 with a delay of a predetermined delay time. However, the configuration for realizing the big hit running effect is not limited to this.

  For example, the data display devices 400 may be connected to each other using a predetermined communication cable, and a big hit running effect execution signal may be transmitted to each other using the communication cable. In this case, when the data display device 400 receives a big hit running effect execution signal from the adjacent data display device 400, the big hit running video is displayed with a predetermined time difference and is displayed on the next data display device 400. A big hit running effect execution signal may be transmitted. In other words, the big hit running effect can be realized by sequentially transmitting the big hit running effect execution signal according to the identification number of the data display device 400 in ascending order or descending order.

  In the above embodiment, the counting device capable of counting the number of local counting balls has been described as the card unit 300 including the counting payout unit 380. However, in the game point type slot machine, a game is played with the holding points corresponding to the number of local counting balls, and the holding points are calculated by the gaming machine. Therefore, the gaming device is not limited to the configuration provided with the counting device. It is also possible to adopt a configuration including a counting device.

  Of the gaming devices, the data display device 400 and the call lamp device 9 which are a kind of information display device do not have a counting device, so that the counting is performed in order to specify that the counting has been performed by the counting device. It is necessary to receive a signal (for example, a counting signal) that can be specified from the counting device.

  In addition, among the game devices, the data display device 400 and the call lamp device 9 which are a kind of information display device do not include a game medium lending processing device, so that the lending processing is executed by the game medium lending processing device. In order to do this, it is necessary to receive a signal (for example, a ball lending signal) that can specify that the lending process has been executed from the gaming medium lending processor.

[7-3. Player terminal]
In the above embodiment, the player terminal possessed by the player has been described as the mobile phone 16A and the notebook personal computer 15A, but the player terminal is not limited to these. For example, a tablet terminal or PDA possessed by a player may be used as the player terminal according to the present invention.

[7-4. Management device]
In the above-described embodiment, the management apparatus that generates the display setting data and the aggregation setting data and distributes the display setting information, the aggregation setting information, and the type setting information of the data display device 400 is described as the hall computer 600. However, the management device is not limited to the hall computer 600. Specifically, a management computer such as the ball management computer 800, a member management computer that manages member information, or a card management computer that manages a gaming card possessed by a member may be used as the management device according to the present invention. Further, a management computer having two or more functions among the various management computers described above may be used as the management apparatus according to the present invention.

[7-5. Information distribution device]
In the above embodiment, the information distribution device that generates display data for the player terminal and distributes the data to the player terminal has been described as the external server 700. However, the information distribution device is not necessarily a computer or server installed outside the store. It doesn't have to be. For example, the various management devices installed in a store may be the information distribution device according to the present invention. In addition, an information distribution computer that generates and distributes display data may be provided independently in the store, and display data may be distributed from the information distribution computer provided in the store to the player terminal. .

[7-6. Generation of data for mobile display]
Various variations can be applied to the generation of portable display data. Hereinafter, this variation will be described.

FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining a variation of generation of portable display data.
FIG. 78 (1) is an example when the data display device 400 generates portable display data.
In this case, the data display device 400 generates mobile display data based on the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information compiled by the device, and transmits the mobile display data to the mobile phone 16A.

FIG. 78 (2) is an example when the external server 700 generates portable display data.
In this case, the mobile phone 16A transmits the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information received from the data display device 400 to the external server 700, and the external server 700 receives the common personal game history information received from the mobile phone 16A and the Mobile display data is generated based on the specific personal game history information, and the mobile display data is transmitted to the mobile phone 16A.

  Further, the data display device 400 outputs the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information to the external server 700. The external server 700 acquires the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information acquired from the data display device 400. The mobile display data may be generated based on the information, and the mobile display data may be transmitted to the mobile phone 16A.

FIG. 78 (3) shows an example in which the hall computer 600 generates portable display data.
In this case, the mobile phone 16A transmits the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information received from the data display device 400 to the hall computer 600, and the hall computer 600 receives the common personal game history information received from the mobile phone 16A and Mobile display data is generated based on the specific personal game history information, and the mobile display data is transmitted to the mobile phone 16A.

  Further, the data display device 400 outputs the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information to the hall computer 600, and the hall computer 600 acquires the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information acquired from the data display device 400. The mobile display data may be generated based on the information, and the mobile display data may be transmitted to the mobile phone 16A.

[7-7. Definition of specific game history]
As described above, the information that is aggregated and displayed / output as the specific game history may be information based on an event that is beneficial to the player. For example, when the slot machine described above is a gaming machine, a slot machine having an AT (assist time) function is considered. For example, if this slot machine is configured to be able to generate an AT again when winning a specific combination (for example, watermelon) in the next game after the end of AT, the next game after the end of AT The occurrence of AT again in this case is a beneficial event for the player. Therefore, information regarding the occurrence of AT again after the end of the AT (number of occurrences, occurrence ratio, etc.) may be aggregated as the specific game history.

  In this case, the information related to the occurrence of another AT after the end of the above-mentioned AT is aggregated and managed as a game history different from the occurrence history of AT based on the occurrence timing of other ATs, and this is displayed by the player. By making it possible to grasp, it can be considered that the player can use it as an index for selecting a base, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

  Of course, information based on events other than events that are directly beneficial to the player may be aggregated and displayed / output as the specific game history. For example, in the above main embodiment, when the gaming machine is an ST-type pachinko machine, information such as the number of ST remaining 10-turn pullbacks and the ST pullback rate is tabulated as a specific game history. Since the ST remaining 10-turn pull-back is included in the ST pull-back, it is the same in that it is possible to obtain the benefit of winning a ball by being controlled to the big hit gaming state. However, since the probability of occurrence of the ST remaining 10-turn pullback is extremely low, the degree of excitement felt by the player when it occurs is different from the other cases. In this way, for example, events that are incidentally or incidentally beneficial rather than directly beneficial to the player, such as events that occur at a low rate or events that have a high degree of interest for the player. Based on the information, the information may be displayed and output.

  Further, regarding the above ST pullback, for example, in addition to the ST remaining 10-round pullback count, the total ST pullback count is aggregated and displayed and output as a specific game history, so that the player can The number of pullbacks within 10 rotations may be compared with the total number of ST pullbacks. In other words, the entire unique game history information and a part of the specific game history information included therein may be aggregated so that they can be compared, and displayed / outputted.

[7-8. Another example of specific game history information]
The specific game history information described in the above embodiment is merely an example. Hereinafter, modifications of the specific game history information will be described.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a modification of the table for peculiar game history information aggregation.
In this specific game history information tabulation table, the type by category of the pachinko machine 200 and the tabulation item are defined in association with each other.
A plurality of types, such as “probability change (non-ST)”, “probability change (ST)”, “probability change (falling lottery)”, and “non-probability change (V winning)”, are defined as the classification type.

  “Probability change (non-ST)” is a type of pachinko machine 200 that is not an ST type of the probability change machines, and (1) a probability change big hit ratio is defined as a tabulation item. The probability variation jackpot ratio is the ratio (%) at which probability variation jackpot has occurred, and is calculated as [number of probability variation jackpots / (normal number of jackpots + number of probability variation jackpots)] × 100.

  “Probability change (ST)” is an ST-type pachinko machine 200 out of the probability change machines, and includes the following items: (1) the number of pullbacks within the remaining 10 rotations of the ST, and (2) the pullback rate within the remaining 10 rotations of the ST. (3) The ST pullback rate is defined.

  “Probability change (falling lottery)” is a type of pachinko machine 200 that performs the falling lottery among the probability changing machines, and (1) the falling rate and (2) the non-falling rate are defined as the aggregate items. . The falling rate is a ratio (%) of falling by the falling lottery, and is calculated as [number of falling times / (number of falling times + number of non-falling times)] × 100. Further, the non-falling rate is a ratio (%) of non-falling due to the falling lottery and is calculated as [non-falling number / (number of falling times + non-falling number)] × 100.

  “Non-Probability Change (V Win)” is a type of pachinko machine 200 that generates a big hit by V winning among non-probability changing machines that do not perform probability change control. (2) V winning average rotation number is determined. The V winning shortest rotation speed is the shortest rotation speed required for V winning. The V winning average rotation number is an average number of rotations required for V winning.

  These total items are total items included in the specific game history information determined for each type of pachinko machine 200. In addition, you may define the table for specific game log | history information total which defined the total item according to the type according to jackpot band instead of the type according to classification. In other words, the pachinko machine provided corresponding to each of the unique game history information aggregation items for each jackpot band such as max type, middle type, light middle type, light type (sweet digital type), minimum type Depending on which jackpot band type pachinko machine 200 is, the information display device may count the tabulation items according to the jackpot type band type.

  In these cases, the information display device performs setting according to the type of the pachinko machine 200. The setting according to the type means that the operation of the own device is determined so that the operation according to the pachinko machine 200 of the type is performed. This setting includes a total setting for totaling game history information corresponding to the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200, a display setting for displaying game history information corresponding to the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200, and Is included.

  As in the above embodiment, a management device such as the hall computer 600 sets the type of the corresponding pachinko machine 200 for each of the plurality of information display devices, and sets the type setting information (setting data) as the information display device. You may make it deliver to. Then, the information display device may perform setting according to the type of the pachinko machine 200 based on the type setting information distributed from the management device.

  In addition, the genre of the pachinko machine 200, the loan rate, and the total items of game history information unique to each manufacturer are determined in the table for specific game history information aggregation, and the information display device displays the genre of the corresponding pachinko machine 200. Alternatively, the specific game history information corresponding to the loan rate and the manufacturer may be aggregated.

[7-9. Information for setting]
In the above-described embodiment, the management device distributes the setting data for aggregation including the type of the corresponding gaming machine and the aggregation item of the game history information from the management device to the information display device. In the above description, it is assumed that the type of the corresponding gaming machine and the information for setting the total items of the game history information are distributed. That is to say, the management device displays, for the information display device, aggregation setting information regarding the type of gaming machine corresponding to the information display device and what method is used to total the game history (game history counting method). Explained as delivering.

  However, the game history counting method is programmed in advance in the information display device, so that the type setting data including only the type of the corresponding gaming machine is distributed from the management device to the information display device. Also good. In addition to the setting data for aggregation, what method (short-range wireless communication, non-contact wireless communication, wired communication, etc.) is used to output the game history to the player terminal (game history output method) The output setting data may be distributed from the management device to the information display device as the output setting information.

  Note that the setting of the type of gaming machine, the game history counting method, and the game history output method in the information display device does not necessarily have to be performed based on the setting information distributed from the management device. It may be realized by a person or a store clerk performing a setting operation on the information display device.

[7-10. Output of some types of game history information]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the information display device outputs game history data including all information of a plurality of types of information included in the common individual game history information and the specific individual game history information. The information display device may output game history data including a part of information of a plurality of types of information included in the information and the specific personal game history information.

  Further, the information display device may output any one of the game history data of the common personal game history data including the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history data including the specific personal game history information. Good. In addition, the information display device may output common personal game history data including some types of information of the common personal game history information, or some types of specific personal game history information. The information display device may output specific personal game history data including information.

  Further, the player may be able to specify which type of information to be acquired from among a plurality of types of information. For example, when a menu screen to be displayed on the information display device is provided with an item for designating the type of information that the player desires to acquire from the personal game history information, and this item is selected by the player, You may make it display the candidate of the personal game history which a player desires to acquire. Then, information corresponding to a candidate designated by the player by a tap operation or the like among the displayed individual game history candidates may be output.

  In addition, the player does not specify the information that the player wants to acquire by operating the information display device, but specifies the type of information that the player wants to acquire on the player terminal side, and the player terminal changes the information display device to the information display device. The type of information designated for the information may be transmitted. In this case, the information display device may output the type of information received from the player terminal to the player terminal.

  Further, depending on the storage capacity of the mobile phone 16A, there are cases where both the common personal game history data and the specific personal game history data cannot be acquired. Therefore, the mobile phone 16A determines the remaining storage capacity, and if both of the game history data cannot be acquired due to insufficient storage capacity, only one of the game history data is acquired. May be.

  In addition, when the storage capacity is insufficient, only the information that the player wants to acquire is specified, and the common personal game including only the information specified by the player among the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information The history data and the specific individual game history data may be output to the player terminal.

  The same applies to the case of generating display data for a player terminal (for example, portable display data). That is, display data including some types of information among a plurality of types of information included in the common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information may be generated and distributed to the player terminal. . In this case, it may be possible to specify from the information display device or the player terminal which type of information the player generates and distributes for display.

[7-11. Game history display according to the same model or type]
The mobile phone 16A and the notebook personal computer 15A may cause the display unit to display specific personal game history information related to the same model of the pachinko machine 200 based on the personal game history information stored in the storage unit. . That is, when a player plays a game with a plurality of types of pachinko machines 200, the individual personal game history information acquired in the game with each type of pachinko machine 200 is stored in the storage unit of the mobile phone 16A or the notebook computer 15A. Remember me. Then, among the individual personal game history information stored and stored, the special personal game history information corresponding to the same model of the pachinko machine 200 may be read out and displayed on the display unit. .

  Further, the mobile phone 16A and the notebook personal computer 15A display the specific personal game history information regarding the same type of pachinko machine 200 on the display unit based on the personal game history information stored in the storage unit. Also good. That is, when a player plays a game with a plurality of types of pachinko machines 200, the individual personal game history information acquired in the game with each type of pachinko machine 200 is stored in the storage unit of the mobile phone 16A or the notebook computer 15A. Remember me. Then, among the stored individual personal game history information, the specific personal game history information corresponding to the same type of the pachinko machine 200 may be read, and the specific personal game history information may be displayed on the display unit. .

  In this case, using the game history display application stored in the mobile phone 16A or the notebook personal computer 15A, for the same model of the pachinko machine 200, the specific personal game history information is displayed on a special display screen corresponding to the model. And for the same type of pachinko machine 200, the specific personal game history information is displayed on a special display screen corresponding to the type. In other words, the player terminal changes the display mode of the game history according to the type of gaming machine played by the player, and causes the display unit to display the player's gaming history in a display mode according to the type of gaming machine. It is preferable to do so.

[7-12. Acquisition of game history information]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the player terminal acquires common personal game history information and unique personal game history information by reading a code displayed on the information display device. However, the game history information is acquired. The method is not limited to these.

  For example, a short-range wireless communication device is provided in the information display device, and common personal game history information and unique personal game history information are transmitted (output) from the information display device to the player terminal using short-range wireless communication. May be.

  In addition, a non-contact communication device is provided in the information display device, and common personal game history information and unique personal game history information are transmitted (output) from the information display device to the player terminal using non-contact communication. May be. In this case, when it is detected that the player terminal has been defeated at a predetermined position provided on the front surface of the information display device after the player has performed a game end operation, The common personal game history information and the specific personal game history information may be transmitted to the player terminal.

  Further, not limited to wireless communication, for example, a player terminal and an information display device are connected by communication using a wired cable, and common personal game history information and unique personal game history information are transmitted (output) to the player terminal by wired communication. It may be.

[7-13. Processing at the player terminal]
In a player terminal (mobile phone 16A, notebook computer 15A, tablet terminal, PDA) possessed by a player, personal game history information (common personal game history information / specific individual game history information) acquired from an information display device is used as a game. It may be possible for a person to publish on the Internet. For example, the personal game history information may be disclosed on its own home page or blog, or the personal game history information may be disclosed on Twitter.

[7-14. Game signal]
As in the above embodiment, the game signal output from the pachinko machine 200 or the slot machine to the information display device may be a common game signal regardless of the type of gaming machine, but differs depending on the type of gaming machine. It may be a game signal. For example, a specific game signal may be output from the gaming machine to the information display device according to the model and type of the gaming machine, the manufacturer, and the like.

  For example, if it is a non-ST type pachinko machine 200, a probability changing signal indicating that a probability change is being performed is output, and if it is an ST type pachinko machine 200, an ST signal indicating that an ST is being executed is output. You may make it output. In addition, if the pachinko machine 200 is of a type having a latent probability change, a latent probability changing signal indicating that the latent probability is being changed may be output. If the pachinko machine 200 is a type having a small hit, A small hitting signal indicating that the small hitting is being performed may be output.

  Regardless of whether the gaming signal output from the gaming machine is common or unique, the information display device can change the gaming signal output from the gaming machine based on the setting according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine. By using this, common game history information and unique game history information can be totaled.

[7-15. Special image display]
The type of the ball to be processed for displaying the special image may be the number of counted balls (the number of locally counted balls), the number of balls stored (the number of balls stored on the day / the number of balls stored in the past), or the number of balls held.

  In addition, in the above-described encapsulated pachinko machine 200B and game point system slot machine, a game is played with game points. Therefore, a special image display process for displaying a special image in accordance with an increase or decrease in the number of game points acquired by the player may be executed. In this case, a threshold value for the number of game points is determined, and a threshold value determination for the number of game points acquired by the player is performed to display / hide a predetermined image (first predetermined image and second predetermined image). That's fine.

  The number of local counting balls counted by the card unit 300 is such that the game balls that have flowed into the counting payout unit 380 are detected by the counting sensor, and a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is counted and paid out in response to detection of one game ball. The example in which the number of local counting balls output from the unit 380 to the control unit 305 and stored in the control unit 305 is increased by 1 has been described. That is, the example in which the number of locally counted balls immediately increases by 1 based on the detection of one game ball has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and based on the detection of one game ball, the “count ball” is once updated (incremented by 1) without immediately updating the local ball count. (1) The “counting ball number” did not increase within a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds), (2) the increase in the “counting ball number” within the predetermined period became smaller than a predetermined value, ( 3) Based on a predetermined condition such as an increase rate of the “count ball” within a predetermined period being smaller than a predetermined rate, the “count ball” may be added to the local count ball number.

  For example, in the big hit game state, the “count ball” increases within a predetermined period, so the local count ball number does not increase during the big hit game state (during round), and the “count ball” is the big hit type (big hit) It increases to a number (for example, 1000 to 2000) according to the period controlled by the gaming state. Then, at the timing after the big hit gaming state is finished and the payout of the winning ball based on the winning at the big winning opening is finished, the “counting ball number” is added to the local counting ball number. In this case, although the number of local counting balls changes rapidly, the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image can be appropriately displayed by the special image display process described above.

[7-16. Other gaming systems]
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a modification of the gaming system.
In the gaming system of FIG. 80 (1), the hall computer 600 includes a game history information totaling unit, and the game history information totaling unit is configured to play game history information (common game history based on a game signal received from the pachinko machine 200. This is a gaming system configured to be able to aggregate information and specific game history information. In this case, the hall computer 600 can output game history information such as displaying game history information aggregated by the game history information aggregation unit on the display unit, printing it on a printing device, or transmitting it to an external device. It is configured.

  The gaming system in FIG. 80 (2) is a gaming system in which a mobile phone 16A possessed by a player is added to the configuration of the gaming system in FIG. 80 (1). In this gaming system, the game history information is distributed from the hall computer 600 to the mobile phone 16A so that the player can view the game history information on the mobile phone 16A.

  The gaming system in FIG. 80 (3) is a gaming system in which an external server 700 is added to the configuration of the gaming system in FIG. 80 (2). In this gaming system, the hall computer 600 transmits game history information to the external server 700. The external server 700 includes a portable display data generation unit, generates portable display data based on the game history information received from the hall computer 600, and distributes the portable display data to the mobile phone 16A.

  These gaming systems are different from the gaming systems in the above-described embodiments in that the management device such as the hall computer 600 aggregates game history information based on the gaming signals output from the gaming machines. By displaying the game history information on the display unit, the manager of the store browses the game history information, or sends the totaled game history information to the player terminal, so that the player can play the game history information on the player terminal. It is a point that can be browsed.

[7-17. Information display device settings]
In the above embodiment, the information display device such as the data display device 400 performs the display setting and the total setting based on the display setting data and the total setting data output from the hall computer 600.

  However, in addition to the configuration described above, the information display device performs display settings and aggregation settings by transmitting display setting data and aggregation setting data to the information display device from the setting remote control owned by the store clerk. May be possible.

  Further, display setting data and tabulation setting data are stored in an information recording medium of a flash memory (USB memory or the like), and this information recording medium is connected to a connection port (USB port or the like) provided in the information display device. By connecting and transferring the setting data for display and the setting data for aggregation to the information display device, the information display device may be able to perform display setting and aggregation setting.

[7-18. Display of game history information]
Instead of displaying each item included in the common game history information in an individual frame as in the above embodiment, each item may be displayed together in one frame. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, each item included in the specific game history information may be displayed in an individual frame instead of being collectively displayed in one frame. Further, each item included in the common game history information and each item included in the specific game history information may be displayed without providing a frame.

[7-19. Others]
In addition to the above-described information display device and gaming device configuration and data configuration, the display operation in the display device for executing the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the game effect lamp Various rendering operations including lighting operations in decoration LEDs and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device provided in an information display device or game device, or may be provided in advance as a computer device. It is also possible to use a form that is distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as the above. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication unit. .

  The technical idea in the above embodiment can be applied to a management device, an information display device, and a gaming device in general. In the above embodiment, the position at which the player points to the display unit is detected by a tap operation on the touch panel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player's fingers are imaged with an infrared CCD camera (motion sensor). Thus, the camera controller may detect the designated position based on the imaging data. The means for detecting the indicated position pointed to by the player is not limited to the infrared CCD camera, but may be an infrared sensor or other non-contact type detection means.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game system 1A 1st game system 1B 2nd game system 1C 3rd game system 1D 4th game system 1E 5th game system 1F 6th game system 200 Pachinko machine 200A Pachinko machine 200B Enclosed pachinko machine Machine 300 card unit 300A card unit 300B provided for a pachinko machine card unit 400B card unit 400 provided for an encapsulated pachinko machine data display device 600 hall computer 700 external server 800 ball management computer 900 ring lamp device 1000 stand terminal 15A Notebook PC 16B mobile phone

Claims (9)

A gaming system comprising an information display device provided corresponding to a gaming machine and capable of displaying a gaming history, and a player terminal possessed by a player who plays with the gaming machine,
The information display device includes:
A setting means for setting according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine;
A personal game history from the start to the end of a game by a player in a corresponding gaming machine, and a common personal game history that is common regardless of the setting of the setting means, and a unique personal game history that differs depending on the setting of the setting means Output means capable of outputting specific information capable of specifying
With
The game system characterized in that the player terminal can display the common individual game history and the specific individual game history specified from the specific information output by the output means. A gaming system according to claim 1,
An information distribution device capable of communicating with the player terminal;
When the specific information output from the output means is received, the player terminal distributes the terminal specific information that can specify the common personal game history and the specific personal game history specified from the specific information as the information distribution To the device,
The information distribution device includes generation means for generating display data for displaying the common individual game history and the specific individual game history specified from terminal specifying information transmitted from the player terminal in a specific manner. , Delivering the display data generated by the generating means to the player terminal,
The game system characterized in that the player terminal displays the common individual game history and the specific individual game history in the specific mode using display data distributed from the information distribution device. A gaming system according to claim 1,
The information display device includes a generating unit that generates display data for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history in a specific manner,
The output means outputs display data generated by the generating means to the player terminal,
The game system characterized in that the player terminal displays the common individual game history and the specific individual game history in the specific manner using display data output from the information display device. A gaming system according to claim 1,
An information distribution device capable of communicating with the player terminal;
The output means outputs the specific information to the information distribution device,
The information distribution device includes a generation unit that generates display data for displaying the common individual game history and the specific individual game history specified from the specific information output by the output unit in a specific mode, the generation Distributing the display data generated by the means to the player terminal;
The game system characterized in that the player terminal displays the common individual game history and the specific individual game history in the specific mode using display data distributed from the information distribution device. A gaming system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
A management device capable of individually distributing the type setting information corresponding to the type of gaming machine corresponding to the plurality of information display devices to the plurality of information display devices;
The gaming system according to claim 1, wherein the setting unit performs setting according to a type of a corresponding gaming machine based on the type setting information distributed from the management device. An information display device provided for a gaming machine and capable of displaying a gaming history,
A setting means for setting according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine;
A personal game history from the start to the end of a game by a player in a corresponding gaming machine, and a common personal game history that is common regardless of the setting of the setting means, and a unique personal game history that differs depending on the setting of the setting means Output means capable of outputting specific information capable of specifying
An information display device comprising: An information display device according to claim 6,
A generator for generating display data for displaying the common personal game history and the specific personal game history in a specific manner;
The information display device, wherein the output means outputs display data generated by the generating means. An information display device according to claim 6,
The information display device, wherein the output means outputs the specific information to an information distribution device communicable with a player terminal possessed by the player. An information display device according to any one of claims 6 to 8,
The setting means performs setting according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine based on the type setting information distributed from the management device capable of distributing the type setting information according to the type of the corresponding gaming machine. An information display device.

Images